advertisement
Operating Manual
Pure IP-PBX
Model No.
KX-NS1000
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety, page 16" before using this product.
KX-NS1000: PCMPR Software File Version 004.30000 or later
Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at: http://www.panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/
Feature Highlights
Feature Highlights
IP Communication
This PBX supports IP communication using a variety of IP telephones, such as the KX-NT300/
KX-NT500 series with Self Labelling and/or
R Bluetooth wireless headsets, Panasonic IP
Softphones, SIP phones, and SIP-CS compatible
Portable Stations.
IP Proprietary
Telephone
SIP-CS S-PS
IP Softphone SIP phone
Consult your dealer
Remote Office
This PBX supports the use of SIP phones connected from a remote office over an IP network through an SBC (session border controller).
SIP phones can be set up by simply connecting the phones to the LAN at the remote office.
IP Network
Easy Operation
If you are using a certain Panasonic telephone that is equipped with a Navigator Key/Jog Dial and a display, it helps you to access the desired feature easily. Also, you will be informed of the arrival of an incoming call or a message waiting by the lamp if it is equipped.
ENTER
Navigator Key Jog Dial
Message/Ringer Lamp
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones (page
Cellular Phone Features
This PBX supports the use of cellular phones with the PBX. Cellular phones can make and receive calls as if they were registered extensions.
Consult your dealer
1.15 Cellular Phone Features (page 234)
2 Operating Manual
Wireless System
This PBX optionally supports a Portable Station
(PS) system. PSs can be used in the PBX with other wired telephones.
Feature Highlights
Built-in Unified Messaging
You can set incoming calls to be redirected to your mailbox to let callers leave voice messages when you are unable to answer the phone. You can access your mailbox to listen to the messages when you are away from the office as well.
Hello, this is John Smith.
Please leave your message.
1.9.12 Using Your PS or S-PS in Parallel with a
Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Call Centre
This PBX offers a built-in Call Centre feature called Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group.
Incoming calls to an ICD Group can be queued or redirected to a preprogrammed destination, answered in order of priority and monitored by a supervisor extension.
ICD Group
Customers Queuing
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre (page 193)
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
Communication Assistant (CA)
CA Client users can connect to the PBX without using an external server. CA Client users can make calls by clicking in a phonebook on their
PC, as well as use many other features.
PC
(Client)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
Operating Manual 3
Feature Highlights
CA Call Accounting
This application can calculate call cost estimates and track call activity for calls that are made through the PBX. Installing the CA Call
Accounting web server software allows you to access CA Call Accounting from any PC by using a web client. You can sort and view, print, or export call information with the web client.
In addition, reports can be created based on exported data.
PC
(Client)
PC
(Web Server)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
In This Manual,
• The following abbreviations are used:
APT → Analogue Proprietary Telephone
Display PT → Proprietary Telephone with a Display
DPT → Digital Proprietary Telephone
IP-PT → IP Proprietary Telephone
PS → Portable Station
P-SIP → Panasonic SIP Phone (KX-HDV series/KX-TGP600), Communication IP camera and Video door phone (KX-NTV series)
PT → Proprietary Telephone
S-PS → SIP-CS compatible Portable Station
SIP extension/SIP Extn. → Extensions of the PBX which uses Session Initiation Protocol for communication.
SLT → Single Line Telephone
• "PT" is used as a generic term to represent IP-PT, DPT, APT and Display PT.
• The suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS1000 NE ) is omitted.
• The following icons are used frequently.
Hints Conditions
Notice
• This PBX supports SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) phones. However, some PBX features may not be available for SIP phones, depending on your telephone type.
• Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
• Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
4 Operating Manual
Feature Highlights
– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over connected networks
NOTES
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• This manual provides basic information on how you can access commonly used PBX functions with proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), portable stations (PSs), SIP phones, SIP-CS compatible Portable Stations (S-PSs), and DSS Consoles. For detailed information about each feature or setting, consult your dealer.
• In this manual, several kinds of PTs appear, as follows:
– IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
– Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
– Analogue Proprietary Telephone (APT)
– Proprietary Telephone with a Display (Display PT)
"PT" is used as a generic term to represent all of these PTs. If a PBX feature only supports specific PTs, such as IP-PTs, the available telephone types are clearly indicated.
• IP-PTs/SIP extensions may become busy and you may not be able to make or receive calls, depending on the network status.
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, consult your dealer.
• Product specifications are subject to change without notice.
• The preset melodies in this product are used with permission of © 2010 Copyrights Vision Inc.
• In this manual P-SIP phones are treated as non-KX-UT series SIP phones.
Notes for SIP Phone and S-PS Users
Before using a SIP phone or S-PS, please read the following notes.
For All SIP phone and S-PS users
A tone may not be heard during an operation depending on the type of SIP phone or S-PS being used. The following operation is an example.
Operating Manual 5
Feature Highlights
[Example]
To use an account code (Account Code Entry)
PT/SLT/PS /SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
(Account)
OR
4 9
Press Account or enter 49 .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number.
account code
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
D.Tone
Enter # .
SIP phone or S-PS users will not hear this tone.
For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users a.
Operations that use feature numbers are limited. Also, flexible buttons are only available for S-PSs and certain KX-UT series SIP phone models. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each operation. However, for KX-UT series SIP phones, a tone may be heard depending on the system settings. For details, consult your administrator.
b.
A maximum of 32 digits can be input on a KX-UT series SIP phone at one time, including feature numbers, etc.
c.
To execute certain operations, you may be required to press the ENTER button on a KX-UT series SIP phone or the CALL button (soft button) on an S-PS during the operation.
The following 5 operations are examples.
[Examples]
To select an idle outside line automatically
PT/SLT/PS /SIP Extn./S-PS
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER .
Off-hook.
0
(L-CO)
OR
/ 9
Press L-CO or enter automatic line access number .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
OR
For S-PS:
Press CALL .
6 Operating Manual
Feature Highlights
To call with a verification code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
4 7 verification code
Off-hook.
Enter 47 . Enter .
verification code PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
desired phone no.
Dial desired phone number.
If a wrong verification code PIN is entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER .
OR
For S-PS:
Press CALL .
To transfer to an outside party using the PBX service
SIP Extn./S-PS
During a conversation
XFER outside line
OR
HOLD
C.Tone
KX-UT series and S-PS only.
KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press TRANSFER .
Other than KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press HOLD .
Seize outside line .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series and S-PS only).
*
To establish a conference call
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER .
OR
For S-PS:
Press CALL .
KX-UT series/S-PS
During a conversation
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER .
OR
For S-PS:
Press CALL .
desired phone no.
C.Tone
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press CONFERENCE .
Talk with multiple parties.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start .
Operating Manual 7
Feature Highlights
To set/cancel Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7
Enter 71 .
1
0
OR
1
OR
2
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
destination extension no.
OR outside line access no.
outside phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number .
Or enter outside line access number and then outside phone number .
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
0
2
3
4
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number .
For "Cancel", go on-hook directly after entering 0.
After entering 0 for "Cancel", for KX-UT series:
Press ENTER .
OR
Go on-hook for S-PS:
Press CALL .
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER .
OR
For S-PS:
Press CALL .
For KX-UT series: max. 26 digits
For non-KX-UT series SIP phone users a.
The following features are available for SIP phone users:
– Making calls
– Answering calls
– Holding calls
– Transferring calls (You cannot go on-hook before the transferred party answers.) b.
The available operations using feature numbers are limited. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each operation.
c.
types may vary depending on the type of telephone being used. For example, when you put a call on hold, a specific tone for the SIP phone may be heard, or no tone may be heard.
d.
Any number pressed while hearing a Busy/DND/Reorder tone, such as the feature number to activate
Automatic Callback Busy, will be ignored.
e.
The operations for SIP phones may differ from the steps in this manual, and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
f.
To execute an operation, some SIP phones may require that the OK button is pressed after pressing all the buttons of the operation.
Notes for KX-WT115 PS Users
The operation and display of the KX-WT115 may differ from KX-TCA series PSs. For example, when the
KX-WT115 is not answered while using it in parallel with a wired telephone, the display of incoming call log is different from that of the display of KX-TCA series PSs.
8 Operating Manual
Feature Highlights
Notes for KX-NT300 Series, KX-NT500 Series, KX-UT Series, and S-PS
Users
If the primary PBX to which your telephone is connected fails, the extension may automatically switch its connection to a secondary PBX.
• The time required to switch to the secondary PBX or back to the primary PBX is different depending on the type of your telephone.
• When the extension switches its connection to the secondary PBX, your call will be disconnected if you are on a call.
• Even if the primary PBX becomes available again, your telephone will not reconnect to it if you are on a call.
• For KX-NT300 series and KX-NT500 series users, if background music (BGM) is being played through your telephone while it is connected to the secondary PBX, it will not reconnect to the primary PBX when it becomes available.
Notes for KX-NT543, KX-NT546, and KX-NT560 IP-PT Users
• While using a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, IP network transmission speed is relatively slow and the secondary Ethernet port cannot be used. To disable ECO mode, consult your dealer.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under licence.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Open Source Software
This product uses Open Source Software. For details, click the Information button in Web Maintenance
Console.
Operating Manual 9
Feature Highlights
10 Operating Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.6.3
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.5
1.5.1
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.9
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice) ................................... 47
To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting) ... 51
Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup) ..................................... 54
Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS]) ....
Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID]) .................. 58
Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor) ............................ 89
Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension ...... 93
Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message) .............. 106
Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock) ............. 108
Operating Manual 11
Table of Contents
1.8.7
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/
Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line
Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security) ........................ 188
1.9.8
1.9.9
1.9.10
1.9.11
Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone) ............................. 189
1.9.12
Using Your PS or S-PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel
1.9.13
Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (One-numbered extension) .... 190
1.9.14
Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear) ......................... 191
1.10
1.10.1
Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up) ................... 193
1.10.2
Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group
1.10.3
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
1.11.5
1.12
1.12.1
Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features) ................ 209
1.12.2
Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message) .......... 215
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.2
1.14
1.14.1
1.14.2
1.14.3
Accessing System Features (System Feature Access) .............................................. 230
1.14.4
Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
1.15
1.15.1
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
12 Operating Manual
Table of Contents
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out) ................... 245
Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor ..................................... 245
3 Customising Your Phone & System ................................................. 275
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) ................................................. 276
System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console ........................................ 293
4 Customising Extensions and the System–for Managers ............... 321
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
Operating Manual 13
Table of Contents
14 Operating Manual
Section 1
Operation
This section shows you step by step how to use each feature. Read this chapter to become familiar with the many useful features of this PBX.
Operating Manual 15
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
1.1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.
The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be observed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in order to operate the unit safely.
WARNING
For All Telephone Equipment
• Do not allow rain to fall on the product or expose the product to moisture. Do not let water, oils, or other liquids to splash onto the product. Such conditions can lead to fire or electric shock, and may impair the performance of the product.
• Do not place the product on an unstable or uneven surface. If the product were to fall over, it may cause injury or damage to the product.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate the product where the power cord may be stepped on or tripped on.
• Do not supply power to a combination of devices that exceeds the total rated capacity of the wall outlets or extension cables used. If outlets, power strips, extension cords, etc. are used in a manner that exceeds their rated capacity, they emit large amounts of heat, which could cause a fire.
16 Operating Manual
1.1.1 For Your Safety
• The product must only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel. The product should be used as-is from the time of purchase; it should not be disassembled or modified. Disassembly or modification can cause a fire, electric shock, or damage to the product.
• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Products that require a power source should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply specified on the product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.
• For safety purposes some products are equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed outlet, please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.
• Regularly clean dust off of all equipment. Excessive amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock, and may impair the performance of the product.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet and contact your dealer in the following cases: a.
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b.
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d.
If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that are explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e.
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f.
If product performance deteriorates.
For the PBX
• Do not insert foreign objects of any kind into this product, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull, bend, rest objects on, or chafe the power cord and plug. Damage to the power cord or plug can cause fire or electric shock.
• Do not attempt to repair the power cord or plug. If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed, contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre for a replacement.
• When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment (attachment bracket, screws) included with the PBX.
• If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return the unit to your dealer.
• Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
• This unit is equipped with an earthed plug. For safety reasons this plug must only be connected to an earthed outlet that has been installed according to applicable regulations.
Operating Manual 17
1.1.1 For Your Safety
• Plug the power cord firmly into an AC outlet. Otherwise, it can cause fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
For All Telephone Equipment
• The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 ℃ ), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzine or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
For the PBX
• When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnect the telecom connection.
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is located near the equipment and is easily accessible.
• Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a sealed environment unless proper ventilation is provided.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack or wall.
• To protect this unit from static electricity, do not touch any external connectors of the unit.
Notice
For All Telephone Equipment
• Read and understand all instructions.
• When using a Panasonic proprietary telephone (PT), use only the correct Panasonic handset.
For the PBX
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the PBX.
• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the outside lines:
1.
Disconnect the PBX from all outside lines.
2.
Connect known working single line telephones (SLTs) to those outside lines.
3.
Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.
18 Operating Manual
1.1.2 Important Safety Instructions
If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the outside line that the SLT is connected to. Contact your telephone company.
If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the outside lines until it has been serviced by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
Note
For All Telephone Equipment
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or holes of the product.
1.1.2 Important Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Rack Mount Instructions—The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with the installation instructions: a.
Elevated Operating Ambient—If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
b.
Reliable Earthing—Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit
(e.g., use of power strips).
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
1.1.3 Precautions
For users in the European Union only
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local municipality.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
Operating Manual 19
1.1.4 Data Security
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol)
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
For users in New Zealand only
• This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom ’111’ Emergency Service.
• The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.
• APPLICABLE ONLY TO TELECOM CUSTOMERS WHO HAVE AUTOMATIC ACCESS TO OTHER
CARRIERS FOR TOLL CALLS
When calling back a number from the Caller ID list, all numbers prefixed with "0 + AREA CODE" will be automatically forwarded to your toll carrier. This includes numbers in your local calling area. The zero + area code should either be removed when calling back local numbers, or check with your toll carrier that a charge will not be levied.
• All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law.
This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used, and what is disclosed to any other party.
• The SLT ports are not specifically designed for 3-wire-connected equipment. 3-wire-connected equipment might not respond to incoming ringing when attached to these ports.
1.1.4 Data Security
In order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure to do so may result in:
• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.
• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.
• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.
What is User Information?
User Information is defined as:
1.
Information stored on the Storage Memory Card:
System data, error data and activation key files.
2.
Information sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device:
System data, sound files for MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Messages), and activation key files.
Requirements
1.
The Storage Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all the customer data. Therefore, do not allow unauthorised access to prevent data leakage.
2.
Always make backups of data stored on the Storage Memory Card and/or perform regular system data backups to a USB memory device or a NAS. For details, consult your dealer.
3.
To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.
20 Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
4.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend: a.
Keeping the password secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your password regularly.
5.
Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.
a.
Make a backup of data stored on the Storage Memory Card.
b.
Using a formatter, format the Storage Memory Card so that information cannot be retrieved from it.
6.
To prevent data leakage, render the Storage Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.
7.
When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device, the confidentiality of that information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or the USB memory device, ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or rendering it physically unusable.
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
What Kind of Telephone Can Be Used?
You can use the following types of telephone with this PBX:
• Panasonic IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
(e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series)
• Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
(e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series)
• Panasonic Analogue Proprietary Telephone (APT)
(e.g., KX-T7700 series)
• Panasonic Portable Station (PS)
(e.g., KX-TCA364, KX-WT125 [Canada only])
• SIP-CS compatible Portable Station (S-PS)
(e.g., KX-UDT series)
• SIP phone
(e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones, P-SIP)
• Single Line Telephone (SLT)
(e.g., rotary pulse telephone)
Which features are available depend on the type of telephone being used. If you are using a Panasonic telephone with a special feature button such as or a display or both, you can follow the operations using the buttons or displayed messages for easy programming. If you use a large display telephone (e.g.,
KX-NT346 or KX-T7636), you can follow the displayed messages to use the features. If your telephone does not have feature buttons and/or a display, you may operate the PBX by entering a feature number instead.
Follow the operation for your type of telephone.
Operating Manual 21
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
• If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone which does not have feature buttons, you may change one of the unused flexible buttons to a feature
button. Refer to "3.1.3 Customising the
Registration for your Portable Station (PS)/SIP Phone/SIP-CS compatible Portable
Station (S-PS)
Your PS, SIP phone, or S-PS must be registered with the PBX and assigned an extension number before initial use, through system programming. To confirm the extension number of your PS, refer to "Your
the instructions for your phone.
Feature Numbers
To use certain features, you need to enter specified feature numbers (and an additional parameter, if required).
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other numbers for easier use. In this manual, the default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
A flexible number is shown as (half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have
changed the feature number. Write the new number in "5.3.1 Feature Number Table" (Appendix).
Notice
The default value of a flexible feature number may vary depending on country/area.
If you use a single line telephone which does not have the " " or "#" keys; it is not possible to access features that have " " or "#" in their feature numbers.
Tone
Display
In this manual, "the display …" refers to the display of a Panasonic telephone. If your telephone is not a
Panasonic display telephone, the message will not be displayed. If you use a Panasonic display telephone, the display helps you confirm the settings. Some telephones also give you easy access to features.
Messages are displayed according to the feature used. By pressing the corresponding button on the side or at the bottom of the display, or by pressing the Navigator Key, you can access various features.
Furthermore, depending on the display telephone used, you can operate features or make calls using the
displayed message. Refer to "1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display".
Notice
In this manual, the display messages are described in English.
22 Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Your Extension Number
If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone, you can check your own extension number on the display. Press the TRANSFER button or Soft (S1) button while on-hook.
ECO mode
If you use a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, the "ECO" icon is shown on the
your dealer.
Using a Navigator Key/Volume Key
The Navigator Key can be used for the display contrast and the volume control or you can search for desired items on the display. Press the Navigator Key/Volume Key in the desired direction.
The contrast or the volume level and the items will change as follows:
Navigator Key
Up
(Level increases )
Up
(Level increases )
Left
ENTER
Right
Down
(Level decreases )
Left Right
Down
(Level decreases )
Volume Key
Up
(Level increases )
Up
(Level increases )
Down
(Level decreases )
Down
(Level decreases )
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the KX-NS1000.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your extension depending on system programming and the type of telephone being used.
Icon Descriptions
The following icons show you the feature availability, notes and action to use the features.
Operating Manual 23
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
This feature cannot be used with a single line telephone.
See "Programming" for Related
Programming if necessary.
8
0
(CO)
OR
/ 9
OR outside line group no.
Seize an outside line (One of the following).
• Press the CO button.
• Dial automatic line access number 0/9.
• Dial outside line group access number and outside line group number.
Press the Call button on the
Doorphone.
Off-hook (One of the following).
• Lift the handset.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button. (To start talking, lift the handset.)
• Press TALK button.
On-hook (One of the following).
• Hang up.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
• Press CANCEL button.
Press the corresponding feature button on the proprietary telephone, KX-UT series SIP phone, or S-PS.
Enter the required number.
<Example> account code
Press the hookswitch lightly.
Talk or make an announcement.
desired no.
Enter the account code.
You will hear a busy, confirmation, dial, ring or ringback tone.
B. Tone: Busy Tone
C. Tone: Confirmation Tone
D. Tone: Dial Tone
R. Tone: Ring Tone
R. B. Tone: Ringback Tone
Dial outside phone number.
extension no.
Dial an extension number.
outside phone no.
phone no.
HOLD
Dial the telephone number.
Press the HOLD button on your
SIP phone.
dial key
REDIAL
Press any dial key (0–9, ,
#).
Press the REDIAL button on your SIP phone.
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone or KX-UT Series SIP
Phone
Panasonic proprietary telephones and KX-UT series SIP phones have useful feature buttons that simplify some operations. For details, refer to the "Location of Controls" or equivalent section in the documentation for your phone.
24 Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Customised Buttons
If the term is in parentheses like (Account) in this manual, it means a flexible button has been made into an
"Customising the Flexible Buttons" when using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
• KX-UT113/KX-UT123: Customised buttons are not available.
• Other than KX-UT113/KX-UT123: The following buttons can be customised:
– Single-CO (S-CO)
– DN
– One-touch Dialling
– Log-in/Log-out
– DSS
– Headset
– Wrap-up
– Call Park
– Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
For S-PS users:
• The following buttons can be customised:
– Single-CO (S-CO)
– DN
– One-touch Dialling
– Log-in/Log-out
– DSS
– Wrap-up
– Call Park
– Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
Button
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Single-CO (S-CO)
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
One-touch Dialling
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Message
Message for Another
Extension
Feature
Used to access an idle outside line for making outside calls.
Incoming outside calls from any outside line arrive at this button.
Used to access an idle outside line in a specified outside line group for making outside calls.
Incoming calls from outside lines in the assigned outside line group arrive at this button.
Used to access a specified outside line for making or receiving outside calls.
Used to access an extension with one touch.
It is also possible to be changed to the other feature button.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123) and S-PSs, unlike a One-Touch button, this type of button cannot be used to dial feature numbers.
Used to access a desired party or system feature with one touch.
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or receiving calls.
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication.
Used to have a Message button for another extension.
Operating Manual 25
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both calls
FWD/DND—Outside calls
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Group FWD—Both calls
Group FWD—Outside calls
Group FWD—Intercom calls
Account
Conference
Terminate
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Call Charge Reference
Call Park
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Feature
Used to forward all calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Used to forward outside calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Used to forward intercom calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Used to forward all the calls to your group to a specified destination.
Used to forward the outside calls to your group to a specified destination.
Used to forward the intercom calls to your group to a specified destination.
Used to enter an account code.
Used to establish a multiple party conversation.
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up.
Used to access special features offered by a host PBX or a telephone company.
Used to check the total call charge for your own extension.
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset parking zone.
Used to park a call in an idle parking zone automatically.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123) and S-PSs, pressing this button selects an idle parking zone from among the Call
Park (preset parking zone) buttons configured on the phone. Set both the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button and the Call Park (preset parking zone) button.
Used to show the incoming call information.
Used to have a Call Log button for incoming call distribution group.
Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode.
Call Log
Call Log for ICD Group
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in/Log-out of a specified group
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for another incoming call distribution group.
Log-in/Log-out for all groups Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for all groups.
Hurry-up
Wrap-up
System Alarm
Used to transfer the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination.
Used to switch the wrap-up status, Ready and Not Ready mode.
Used to confirm a PBX error. Also, pressing the System Alarm button displays the current One-look networking status.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Answer
Used to switch the time service mode.
Used to answer an incoming call.
Release
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer.
26 Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
ISDN Service
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
ISDN-Hold
Headset
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
Two-way Record
Two-way Transfer
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Voice Mail Transfer
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
CTI
Check-in
Check-out
Cleaned-up
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
Directory Number (DN)
(KX-UT series SIP phones
[except KX-UT113/
KX-UT123]/S-PS only)
Feature
Used to change the toll restriction/call barring level of other extension users temporarily.
Used to access an ISDN service.
Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR services.
Used to switch between the COLP and COLR services.
Used to transfer a call using telephone company.
Used to talk using the headset.
Used to switch the time service mode, Automatic or Manual.
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension.
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension with one touch.
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. Also used to access the Unified Messaging system or the voice mail features of a
VPS with one touch.
Used to access an extension connected to other PBXs in the network with one touch.
Used to access CTI features.
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-out to Checkin.
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-in to Checkout.
Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and Not
Ready.
Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls.
Used to show the current status of another extension, call the extension, and pick up or transfer calls to it.
Used to make intercom or outside calls.
How to Follow the Steps
An example of system operation is shown below.
Operating Manual 27
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Calling Another Extension
Feature title
To call an extension (Intercom Call)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS extension no.
OR
Telephone types
The abbreviations of telephone types are explained in
"Telephone types in procedures" below.
Off-hook.
(DSS)
Dial extension number or press DSS .
Talk.
The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
Operation steps
The description of the icons are explained on
"Icon Descriptions".
Conditions
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-
PHONE button.
Hints
Customising Your Phone
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode— Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Programming References: The related or required programming is noted.
Telephone types in procedures
The following abbreviations are displayed at the top left of each procedure and indicate which types of telephones support the operation. However, in some cases a specific model number is given instead (e.g.,
KX-UT136, KX-UT series).
Abbreviation Telephone Type
PT
PS
SIP Extn.
S-PS
SLT
DPT
Display PT
Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series,
KX-NT265, KX-T7700 series)
Digital Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series,
KX-DT500 series)
Proprietary Telephone with a Display (e.g. KX-NT346, KX-NT546,
KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
Portable Station (e.g., KX-TCA364, KX-WT125 [Canada only])
SIP phone (e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones, P-SIP)
SIP-CS compatible Portable Station (e.g., KX-UDT series)
Single Line Telephone (e.g., KX-T7710)
28 Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Connection Example
This diagram shows you a connection example.
Telephone Company
Pure IP-PBX
PC
Printer
Remote PC
External Sensor
Doorphone & Door Opener
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)
Pager/
Speaker
Amplifier
IP Softphone,
CA * 3
Client PC
S-PS SIP-CS
CTI Server
PC
*1
*2
*3
ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider
DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
CA: Communication Assistant
Private
IP Network
Built-in
Router
ITSP * 1
Network
Router
WAN
DCE * 2
(e.g., ADSL
Modem)
SLT
Fax Machine
CS PS
IP-PT
APT DSS Console
SIP Phone
IP-CS PS
DPT DSS Console
Voice Processing
System
Operating Manual 29
1.2 Making Calls
1.2 Making Calls
1.2.1 Basic Calling
–
–
–
–
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
Calling Another Extension
To call an extension (Intercom Call)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
OR
*
(SDN)
Dial extension number , or press DSS or SDN .
Talk.
• The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
• * You have to press the SDN button once or twice depending on the mode of the SDN
button. For details, refer to "1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory
•
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
• For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
• Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-
PHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing Select the seized line when going off-hook.
•
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
To call an operator (Operator Call)
You can call an extension or a group assigned as the operator.
30 Operating Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
9
OR
0
Enter 9 or 0 .
• The operator call number (default) varies depending on country/area.
Calling an Outside Party
You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are made via your PBX.
Select one of the following methods:
To select an idle outside line automatically (Automatic Line Access)
PT/SLT/PS /SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
0
(L-CO)
OR
/ 9
Press L-CO or enter automatic line access number .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
• The automatic line access number (default) varies depending on country/area.
To select an idle outside line in the specified outside line group automatically
(Outside Line Group Access)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
8
(G-CO)
OR outside line group no.
Press G-CO or enter outside line group access number and then outside line group number (2 digits).
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
Operating Manual 31
1.2.1 Basic Calling
To select the specified outside line
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
Off-hook.
(S-CO)
Press S-CO .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
• Each of the S-CO button or G-CO button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The line is idle.
Red on: The line is in use.
• You may be restricted from making a call to the specified outside party. To make a call, refer
to "1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions".
• To confirm number before dialling, you can enter a phone number and confirm it on the display and then go off-hook. (Predialling)
• Call Charge Reference
You can confirm your total call charges by pressing the Call Charge Reference button.
• To make a call to another party without going on-hook, press the FLASH/RECALL button. It will re-access the outside line and provide external dial tone. Pressing the
Terminate button will provide intercom dial tone. You can dial the new phone number without going on/off-hook.
• Hands-free Operation
You can make an outside call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-
PHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing Select the seized line when going off-hook.
•
Create or edit a Loop-CO (L-CO) button, a Group-CO (G-CO) button, a Single-CO (S-CO) button, a Terminate button or a Call Charge Reference button.
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
You can access extensions connected to other PBXs in a private network.
To call
PT/SLT/PS /SIP Extn./S-PS
7 extension no.
*
OR private phone no.
*
Off-hook.
Dial extension number or enter 7 and then dial private phone number .
Talk.
32 Operating Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
• * Which type of telephone number must be entered depends on the settings of your PBX.
To call with one touch
PT/PS
Off-hook.
(NDSS)
Press NDSS .
Talk.
• To start monitoring another PBX extension after customising an NDSS button, go offhook, press the NDSS button, and go on-hook.
The NDSS button light will show the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: The extension is busy.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
You may give a specified account code to extension users and check their telephone usage. You can specify an account code for each client and check the call duration.
PT/SLT/PS /SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
(Account)
OR
4 9
Press Account or enter 49 .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number.
account code
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter # .
D.Tone
Operating Manual 33
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
• A Panasonic proprietary telephone extension user can enter an account code during a conversation and when hearing reorder tone after the other party hangs up.
• Account codes may use the digits "0" through "9".
• Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter an account code to make an outside call.
• If you enter the wrong code, press the " " key and re-enter the account code.
• For your convenience, you can store the code with the phone number in the memory (e.g.,
Speed Dialling).
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an Account button.
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
This is convenient for frequently dialled phone numbers.
–
With a One-touch Button (One-touch Dialling)
–
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
–
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX (System Speed Dialling)
–
–
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook (Hot Line)
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick Dialling)
With a One-touch Button (One-touch Dialling)
You can store a phone number into the flexible button for one-touch operation.
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
Off-hook.
(One-touch
Dialling)
Press One-touch
Dialling .
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a One-touch Dialling button, store the desired phone number or feature number.
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
You can store up to 100 numbers at your extension for your personal use.
34 Operating Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
This feature is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
3 0
Enter 30 . personal speed dialling no.
desired phone no.
Enter personal speed dialling number
(2 digits).
Enter desired phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Enter #
Enter outside line access number before outside phone number.
.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To dial
PT/SLT/SIP Extn./S-PS
OR personal speed dialling no.
Off-hook.
Press AUTO DIAL or enter .
Enter .
Dial personal speed dialling number (2 digits).
•
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
• For SIP phone and S-PS users: Telephones display only personal speed dialling numbers.
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX (System Speed Dialling)
You can make calls using speed dialling numbers stored in the PBX.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
OR system speed dialling no.
Off-hook.
Press AUTO DIAL or enter .
Dial system speed dialling number (3 digits).
•
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
• For SIP phone and S-PS users: Telephones display only system speed dialling numbers.
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook (Hot Line)
You can make an outside call simply by going off-hook if you have preprogrammed your phone.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
Operating Manual 35
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
7 4 0
Enter 740 .
2
Enter 2 .
desired phone no.
Enter desired phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Enter #
Enter outside line access number before outside phone number.
.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
7 4 0
Enter 740 .
1
OR
0
Set
Cancel
Enter 1 to set or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Off-hook.
To dial
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
• To call another party, dial the desired party’s phone number before the preprogrammed number is dialled.
• You should assign the intercom line as the seized line when going off-hook. (Preferred Line
Assignment—Outgoing)
• It is possible to increase the delay before Hot Line is activated through system programming. This can be useful if you require more time after going off-hook to dial another telephone number or extension number.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick Dialling)
You can make a call simply by pressing the preprogrammed number for quick dialling.
36 Operating Manual
1.2.3 Redial
Off-hook.
quick dialling no.
Dial quick dialling number (max. 8 digits).
• This is a useful feature for hotels.
For example, to dial Room Service, dial the digit "3", not the full extension number.
1.2.3 Redial
This is convenient when calling the same outside party again.
–
Redialling the Last Number You Dialled (Last Number Redial)
Redialling the Last Number You Dialled (Last Number Redial)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
Off-hook.
Press REDIAL or enter # .
SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
OR
REDIAL
Press REDIAL .
• Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialled.
• After pressing REDIAL, if you hear a busy tone again, press REDIAL to retry.
• If you want to log outgoing intercom calls to the outgoing call log, consult your System
Installer.
• If you have seized a trunk, pressing the REDIAL button will be ignored if the last number you dialled was an extension.
Operating Manual 37
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
• Automatic Redial
To redial automatically, press the SP-PHONE button and then the REDIAL button, or press the REDIAL button directly. It will keep trying the busy number until the called party answers or until a specified timeout.
You can perform other tasks during dialling. To cancel, press the FLASH/RECALL button.
Some outside lines may not support this feature.
This feature is not available for the KX-T7665 or PS.
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
–
–
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)
Setting Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber [CCBS])
–
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
–
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication (Message
–
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
–
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
–
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)
You can set the telephone to receive callback ringing:
• when a dialled extension becomes idle.
• when your desired outside line that is in use by another extension becomes idle.
You cannot set Automatic Callback Busy for a busy party outside of the PBX.
When you answer the callback ringing:
• For an outside call: The line is seized.
• For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing automatically.
To set (for both extension and outside line)
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
6
Enter 6 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
38 Operating Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To answer the callback ringing from an idle extension
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a callback ringing
R.B.Tone
Off-hook.
Talk.
To answer the callback ringing from an idle outside line
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a callback ringing outside phone no.
Off-hook.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
• If you do not answer the callback ringing within 10 seconds, this feature will be cancelled.
To cancel callback ringing (Automatic Callback Busy Cancel)
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
4 6
Enter 46 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
Setting Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
[CCBS])
You can set the telephone to receive callback ringing when a busy called party on an ISDN line becomes free.
When you answer the callback ringing, the called party’s telephone number is automatically dialled.
Operating Manual 39
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
6
C.Tone
Enter 6 .
On-hook.
To answer while hearing a callback ringing
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
To cancel (CCBS Cancel)
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
4 6
Enter 46 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• If you do not answer within a specified time period, this feature will be cancelled.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
You can inform the called party that your call is waiting.
This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling (BSS).
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
1
Enter 1 .
40 Operating Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
• Depending on the type of the other party’s telephone, you may be able to talk to the other party using the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]), or you can send a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), if they are having another conversation using the handset.
Refer to "1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/
• Depending on system programming and the called extension’s setting, a call waiting tone may be sent automatically without performing the operation above.
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who Left an
Indication (Message Waiting)
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
When the called extension is busy or does not answer your call, you can leave a notification so that the called party may call you back.
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
As a message receiver, the Message button light or Message/Ringer
Lamp lets you know that a call has been received. If you receive notification, you can call the caller back by a simple operation.
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
To leave a message waiting indication
PT/SLT/PS
When the called extension is busy or does not answer
OR
4
Press MESSAGE or enter 4 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
To leave/cancel a message waiting indication
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 0
Enter 70 .
1
OR
0
Leave
Cancel
Enter 1 to leave or 0 to cancel.
desired extension no.
C.Tone
Enter desired extension number .
On-hook.
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
To check the left message and call back
Operating Manual 41
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
PT/PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE until the desired extension appears.
To call back
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk.
7 0
OR
2
Press MESSAGE or enter 70 and then 2 .
KX-UT series/S-PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE .
Off-hook.
Talk.
Talk.
S-PS/SIP Extn.
7 0
Enter 70 .
2
Enter 2 .
Talk.
Off-hook.
• Performing this operation after receiving multiple waiting indications will call back the extension that left the most recent message waiting indication.
To clear message waiting indications left on your extension
42 Operating Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
PT/SLT/PS/S-PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
7 0
Enter 70 .
0
Enter 0 .
your extension no.
Dial your extension number .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• The Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp shows the current status as follows:
Off : No message
Red on : You have a message.
• The display shows the messages starting with the most recent call.
• At a called extension, the MESSAGE button allows you to clear message waiting indications if you do not want to call the callers back. To clear, press the MESSAGE button and then press the soft button. This operation cannot be performed using KX-UT series SIP phones or S-PSs.
• On your PT, you can establish one or more Message for Another Extension buttons. These buttons can accept the message waiting notification of other extensions or various incoming call distribution groups.
In other words, you can monitor the message waiting notifications of other telephones.
• A single line telephone extension user will receive a special dial tone as message waiting notification when going off-hook.
• The message waiting lamp of a single line telephone can also let you know that you have a message in the same way as the Message button.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Message button or Message for Another Extension button.
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who is busy on the telephone and establish a three-party conversation. After pressing a DSS button, you can check the caller information of the call to another extension on the display before establishing a three-party conversation.
Operating Manual 43
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To join an intercom call
PT/SLT/PS
Party joining the call
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller information of the call to another extension is displayed.
OR
(SDN)
OR extension no.
B. Tone
Off-hook.
Press red DSS or SDN , or dial extension number .
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
3
Enter 3 .
C.Tone
Talk.
A three-party conversation is now established.
C.Tone
Talk.
To join an outside call
PT/PS
Party joining the call
(CO)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press red CO or SDN .
Parties in the conversation
B. Tone
During a conversation
3
Enter 3 .
C.Tone
Talk.
A three-party conversation is now established.
C.Tone
Talk.
• SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but other extensions can call them using
Executive Busy Override.
• To join another conversation, you must have Executive Busy Override enabled at your extension through COS programming.
• It is possible for an originating extension to leave a three-party conversation with an outside party and let the two other parties talk by simply going on-hook.
44 Operating Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
For the originating extension
To talk to each party alternately
PT/PS
During a conversation
To continue
Press TRANSFER .
Talk to the other party.
• You can also deny others the possibility of joining your conversation (Default: Allow). Refer
to "1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
The preprogrammed extension can monitor another extension. After pressing a DSS button, you can check the caller information of the call to another extension on the display. Then, you can choose to monitor the call, if necessary.
To monitor
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller information of the call to another extension is displayed.
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR extension no.
B. Tone
5
Enter 5 .
C.Tone
Monitoring starts
Press red DSS , PDN , or SDN , or dial extension number .
• SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but they can be monitored by other extensions.
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who has set the DND feature.
Operating Manual 45
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)
PT/SLT/PS extension no.
1
DND Tone R.B.Tone
Off-hook.
Dial extension number .
Enter 1 .
Talk.
• SIP phone users cannot use DND Override to call someone who has set the DND feature, but can let other extensions call them using DND Override when the DND feature is set.
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)
You can access services provided by the ISDN.
To access
PT/PS outside line
Off-hook.
Seize outside line .
(ISDN Service)
(ISDN Service)
(If all required digits are stored.)
OR service code
(ISDN Service)
(Requires to dial additional digits.)
Press ISDN service .
Or press ISDN service and then enter service code and then press ISDN service again.
On-hook.
• Availability of features depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an ISDN Service button.
46 Operating Manual
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/
Voice)
The caller can alternate the alerting method, either ring or voice, when making an intercom call.
On the other hand, any extension can set the alerting method, either ring or voice, when receiving an intercom call.
Ringing (Default): You can call the other party with a ring tone.
Voice-calling: You can talk to the other party immediately after confirmation tone.
Ring
Ring
OR
Hello
To change the method
PT/SLT/PS
After dialling
C.Tone
Enter . Talk.
• Voice-calling from a SIP extension is not available.
• If the called party uses a SIP extension, single line telephone (SLT) or portable station (PS),
Voice-calling is not available.
• This feature is not available when the called party’s telephone is in the Voice Call Deny mode.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
—Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
–
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS Access)
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS Access)
You can use your calling privileges (Class of Service) at another extension. You may override restrictions which have been set. To use this feature, an original extension number and an extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number) are required. You can make a call by entering a verification code and verification code PIN.
Operating Manual 47
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
To call (Walking COS)
PT/SLT/PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
4 7
Enter 47 . extension no.
extension no.
Dial your extension number .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
extension no.
phone no.
Dial desired phone number.
If a wrong extension PIN is entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number.
To call with a verification code (Verification Code Entry)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
4 7 verification code
Off-hook.
Enter 47 . Enter .
verification code PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
desired phone no.
Dial desired phone number.
If a wrong verification code PIN is entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct
Inward System Access [DISA])
–
48 Operating Manual
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
Calling through DISA
When outside callers access extensions in the PBX, a prerecorded message greets the caller and gives information about how to access an extension. You do not need the operator’s assistance.
You may be able to access system features or call an outside party with your password depending on the security mode.
To call an extension
From Outside Telephone PIN: Personal Identification Number
In No Security Mode/Trunk Security Mode
DISA phone no.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Off-hook.
Dial DISA phone number .
In All Security Mode * desired extension no.
Dial desired extension number .
Off-hook.
DISA phone no.
Dial DISA phone number.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
4
Enter 47 .
7 your extension no.
OR verification code
Dial your extension number , or enter and then verification code .
extension PIN
OR verification code PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN or verification code PIN (max.10 digits).
desired extension no.
Dial desired extension number .
Operating Manual 49
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
To call an outside party
From Outside Telephone
In No Security Mode
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
DISA phone no.
Dial DISA phone number .
R.B.Tone &
DISA message outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
In Trunk Security Mode/All Security Mode
*
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
DISA phone no.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
4 7 your extension no.
OR verification code
Off-hook.
Dial DISA phone number .
Enter 47 . Dial your extension number , or enter and then verification code .
extension PIN
OR verification code PIN
Enter extension PIN or verification code PIN
(max.10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
• * Callers from preprogrammed outside numbers can access the PBX through DISA without a password (extension PIN/verification code PIN) ( DISA Automatic Walking COS ).
• When making an outside call using Walking COS through DISA, the CLIP number for that call will be that of the extension seized by Walking COS.
To retry
From Outside Telephone
To dial a different number during a conversation with an outside party or while hearing the ringback, reorder, or busy tone phone no.
Enter .
DISA message
Dial phone number .
Dial a line access number as the first digit when calling an outside party.
50 Operating Manual
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside
Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a.
Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b.
Keeping your passwords (verification code PIN/extension PIN) secret.
c.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
d.
Changing PINs regularly.
• Time limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before the specified time limit. To extend, press any dial button except .
• If Built-in Automated Attendant service is set, you can access the desired extension simply by pressing a single digit (0–9) from the options given the prerecorded message.
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through
DISA (Remote Setting)
You can set the following features on your telephone from another extension or through DISA.
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
• Absent Message
• Extension Dial Lock
• Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
From another extension
PT/SLT/PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
4 7
Enter 47 . extension no.
extension no.
Dial your extension number .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
extension no.
feature no.
Dial desired feature number.
If a wrong extension PIN is entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Operating Manual 51
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
Through DISA
From Outside Telephone PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
DISA phone no.
Dial DISA phone number .
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
4 7
Enter 47 . extension no.
extension no.
Dial your extension number .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
extension no.
feature no.
Dial desired feature number.
If a wrong extension PIN is entered, you hear an alarm tone.
52 Operating Manual
1.3 Receiving Calls
1.3 Receiving Calls
1.3.1 Answering Calls
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
Talk.
Select one of the following methods:
· Lift the handset to receive the preferred line.
(Default: Ringing line is selected.)
· Press the SP-PHONE button.
· Press the flashing CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or DN button directly.
· Press the ANSWER button.
• Hands-free Operation
You can receive a call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE button. KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248 users can have a conversation in hands-free mode by pressing the flashing CO or DN button.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
•
Create or edit an Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group), Primary Directory Number
(PDN), or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button.
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
You can answer an incoming call without going off-hook as soon as the line is connected. When an intercom call arrives, you will hear the caller talking without the phone ringing. When an outside call arrives, you will hear the caller talking after a preprogrammed number of rings. Hands-free Answerback for outside calls requires system programming.
Operating Manual 53
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
Press
AUTO ANS .
• PT users: The AUTO ANS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not set
Red on: Set
• KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670) users: When Hands-free Answerback is set, the AUTO ANS icon appears on the display.
• PS, S-PS, and KX-UT670 users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
–
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
–
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension or group from your phone without leaving your desk.
The following types of pickup are available:
Group Call Pickup: Picks up a call within your group.
Directed Call Pickup: Picks up a specified extension’s call.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
(DSS)
OR
4 0
OR
4 1 group no.
extension no.
Group
Directed
Press flashing DSS .
Enter 40 and then dial group number (2 digits).
Or enter 41 and then dial extension number .
C.Tone
Talk.
Caller Information Display before Call Pickup using DSS button
Depending on system programming, you can confirm the caller information of a call to another extension using the DSS button before picking up the call. Pressing the corresponding DSS button will call the extension receiving the call rather than picking up the call. While hearing the busy tone, you can check the caller information on the display. You can pick up the call by pressing the same DSS button again.
54 Operating Manual
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
PT/PS
Off-hook.
(DSS)
Press flashing DSS .
A busy tone is heard and the caller information of the call to another extension is displayed.
(DSS)
Press DSS again.
Talk.
• If you receive a call waiting tone, you can ask a third party to pick up your second call with Directed Call Pickup.
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup Group Monitor)
Depending on system programming, PT users such as colleagues can view the caller information of a call to another extension which belongs to the same call pickup group. The user can view the caller’s information on the LCD while their PT is idle. You can pick up the call by pressing the ANSWER soft button.
To pickup a call
PT
While displaying monitoring information for a call pickup group
ANSWER
Press ANSWER .
Talk.
• Available telephones are as follows:
– IP-PTs
–
• While the caller information is displayed on the LCD, going off-hook will not answer the call.
*1 Except models with a single line display.
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup
Deny)
You can deny or allow other people to pick up your calls.
Operating Manual 55
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 2 0
Enter 720 .
1
OR
0
Deny
Allow
Enter 1 to deny or 0 to allow.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer
From Any Station [TAFAS])
You can be notified of incoming outside calls through an external speaker. These calls can be answered from any extension.
Through an external speaker
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
4 2
Off-hook.
Enter 42 . site ID
Enter the site ID (2 digits: 01–16).
C.Tone
Talk.
• You can also receive a paging announcement via a speaker with this operation.
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
The ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are convenient for operators using headsets.
With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls.
With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or complete transferring a call.
To answer
PT
ANSWER
Talk.
Press ANSWER .
56 Operating Manual
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
To transfer a call
PT
During a conversation
TRANSFER
(DSS)
OR desired phone no.
Press TRANSFER .
Press DSS or dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
To talk to a waiting caller
PT
While hearing a call waiting tone
ANSWER
The called party answers.
RELEASE
Press RELEASE.
Press ANSWER .
Talk.
To transfer an outside call to an extension with a one-touch operation
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
The called party answers.
RELEASE
Press RELEASE .
Press DSS .
The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is called immediately.
To end a conversation
PT
During a conversation
RELEASE
Press RELEASE .
Operating Manual 57
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID])
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an Answer button or a Release button.
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call
Identification [MCID])
You can ask your telephone company to trace a malicious calling party during a conversation or after the calling party hangs up.
You will receive the information on the malicious call later on.
To request MCID
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation or when hearing a reorder tone after the calling party hangs up.
OR
OR
7 3
C.Tone
OR
Press TRANSFER or
Recall/hookswitch .
Enter 7 3 .
Talk or on-hook.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
58 Operating Manual
1.4 During a Conversation
1.4 During a Conversation
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
–
–
–
–
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
• You can transfer a held call without talking, and go on-hook even if the transferred party does not answer the call.
If a transferred call is not answered within a specified time, it will ring at a preprogrammed extension, if set, or at your extension again. If you are off-hook at that time, you will hear an alarm tone. If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• For users of KX-UT series SIP phones:
When using a transfer feature on a KX-UT series SIP phone, the operation is different to that of other PTs, as follows.
– When the transferring party presses the TRANSFER button to transfer a call, the Caller
ID of the transferring party is sent to the transfer destination party.
– When pressing the TRANSFER button to transfer a call received from an outside line, if the transfer destination is using a PT, the transferred call will be received to the
INTERCOM button. The call will be recorded as an intercom call from the transferrer, in the transfer destination's call log.
• For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
– Even if your telephone has a TRANSFER button, you cannot use it to transfer calls.
Please make sure to use the HOLD button.
– The transfer operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section, and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
– Blind Transfer
Blind Transfer may be available on your phone. For details about using Blind Transfer, refer to the documentation for your SIP phone. (This feature is not available when transferring to an outside party using the SIP service.)
Operating Manual 59
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press
TRANSFER .
C.Tone
(DSS)
OR extension no.
Press DSS or dial extension number .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
C.Tone
extension no.
Dial extension number .
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
SIP Extn./S-PS
During a conversation
XFER extension no.
OR C.Tone
HOLD
KX-UT series and S-PS only.
KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press TRANSFER .
Other than KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press HOLD .
Dial extension number .
Talk.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series and S-PS only).
On-hook.
*
• * For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button
(KX-UT series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the HOLD button (non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being used), you can return to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be disconnected.
• For all types of telephone users, if the call is not transferred within a specified time, you will hear an alarm (Transfer Recall).
60 Operating Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
•
For the transfer operation using an SDN button, refer to "1.5.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension".
To transfer with one touch (One-touch Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation with an outside party
(DSS)
Press DSS .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
• System programming is required to use the One-touch Transfer feature during a conversation with an extension.
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Some extensions may be restricted from performing this feature.
PT/PS
During a conversation
C.Tone
outside line outside phone no.
Press TRANSFER .
Seize outside line .
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
C.Tone
outside line outside phone no.
Press Recall/hookswitch .
Seize outside line .
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
On-hook.
Operating Manual 61
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
SIP Extn./S-PS
During a conversation
XFER outside line
OR
C.Tone
HOLD
KX-UT series and S-PS only.
KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press TRANSFER .
Other than KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press HOLD .
Seize outside line .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series and S-PS only).
*
• * For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button
(KX-UT series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the HOLD button (non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being used), you can return to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be disconnected.
• Time limit
Both the caller and the transferred party will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before a specified time period, and the call will be disconnected.
• To return to the held call before the destination answers, press the TRANSFER button, the corresponding CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button, or the hookswitch.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
PT/PS
During a conversation phone no.
(ISDN-Hold)
Press ISDN-Hold .
Dial phone number .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
62 Operating Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
6 2
Press
TRANSFER .
C.Tone
Enter 62 .
phone no.
Dial phone number .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
6 2 phone no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
Enter 62 .
Dial phone number .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
• To retrieve the held call, press the TRANSFER button, Recall/hookswitch.
• Even if you go on-hook while transferring a call, it is transferred.
• After the call is transferred, the line becomes idle.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an ISDN-Hold button.
Operating Manual 63
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
To transfer a call with announcement (Attended Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
C.Tone
outside line
Press TRANSFER .
outside phone no.
Seize outside line .
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
On-hook.
SIP Extn./S-PS
During a conversation
XFER
C.Tone
KX-UT series and S-PS only.
Press TRANSFER .
outside line
Seize outside line .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
outside line outside phone no.
Press Recall/hookswitch .
Seize outside line .
Dial outside phone number .
Talk.
On-hook.
On-hook.
64 Operating Manual
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To transfer a call without announcement (Blind Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
C.Tone
6 1 outside phone no.
Press
TRANSFER .
Enter 61 .
Dial outside phone number .
Enter # .
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
C.Tone
6 1
Enter 61 .
outside phone no.
Dial outside phone number .
Enter # .
On-hook.
• The availability of this feature depends on your SIP service provider.
• You cannot return to the held call after dialling the destination’s number.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a One-touch Dialling button, store the Blind Transfer feature number.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
–
–
Holding in a System Parking Zone (Call Park)
• For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
The holding operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section, and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
Holding
There are two types of hold. The difference between them is that other people can retrieve your held call
(Regular Hold) or not (Exclusive Call Hold). As they can be alternated, ask your manager what the current mode is.
Operating Manual 65
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To hold (Call Hold)
PT/PS
During a conversation
C.Tone
OR
5
Press HOLD, or press TRANSFER and then enter 50 .
0 C.Tone
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
5 0
Enter 50 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
SIP Extn./S-PS
During a conversation
OR
HOLD
Press HOLD .
On-hook.
On-hook.
66 Operating Manual
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To retrieve a call (Call Hold Retrieve)
PT/SLT/PS
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(CO)
OR
Off-hook.
OR
5 0
A confirmation tone is heard.
Press flashing CO or INTERCOM, or enter 50 .
Talk.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
Off-hook.
5 3
(CO)
OR held line no.
A confirmation tone is heard.
Press CO, or enter 53 and then held line number (3 digits).
Talk.
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
Off-hook.
5
Enter 51 .
1
(DSS)
OR holding extension no.
Press DSS or dial holding extension number .
C.Tone
Talk.
Operating Manual 67
1.4.2 Holding a Call
SIP Extn./S-PS
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(S-CO)
OR
(DN)
OR
Off-hook.
OR
HOLD
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS:
Press flashing S-CO or DN .
Other than KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS:
Press HOLD .
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
Talk.
5 3 held line no.
A confirmation tone is heard.
Off-hook.
Enter 53 .
Dial held line number (3 digits).
Talk.
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
5 1 holding extension no.
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter 51 .
Dial holding extension number .
Talk.
68 Operating Manual
1.4.2 Holding a Call
• For PT users: The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly : Your held call
Flashing red : Another extension’s held call
– Exclusive Call Hold mode
Flashing green moderately : Your held call
Red on : Another extension’s held call
• For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The S-CO button light shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly : Your held call
Flashing red : Another extension’s held call
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time , you will hear an alarm as a reminder
(Hold Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• Hold Mode Change (PT only)
After pressing the HOLD button, if you press the HOLD button again, the status switches from the Regular Hold mode to the Exclusive Call Hold mode or from the Exclusive Call
Hold mode to the Regular Hold mode.
• If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold automatically by pressing another CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button to make or answer another call.
•
For the Call Hold Retrieve operation using a PDN/SDN button, refer to "1.5.1 Primary
Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension".
Holding in a System Parking Zone (Call Park)
You can put a call on hold in a common parking zone of the PBX so that any extension can retrieve the parked call. You can use this feature as a transferring feature.
A call can be put into either a specified parking zone (Specified) or any idle parking zone (Auto). If a Call
Park button and Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button have been established, you can select either way to park by simply pressing the corresponding button.
When a call is parked automatically, or more than one call has been parked at the same time, you need to specify the parking zone number to retrieve the required call.
To set
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
During a conversation
(Call Park)
Press Call Park .
Operating Manual 69
1.4.2 Holding a Call
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER .
5 2
Enter 52 .
parking zone no.
OR
Specified
Auto
C.Tone
Enter a specified parking zone number (2 digits) or press
to park at an idle parking zone automatically.
If you hear a busy tone, enter another parking zone number or press again.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
5 2
Enter 52 .
parking zone no.
Enter a specified parking zone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
If you hear a busy tone, enter another parking zone number.
On-hook.
To retrieve (Call Park Retrieve)
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
(Call Park)
Press a flashing Call Park .
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
5
Enter 52 .
2 stored parking zone no.
Dial stored parking zone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
70 Operating Manual
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
• If a call is parked automatically, confirm the parking zone number on the display.
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Call
Park Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• For SIP phone users: Any SIP phone user can retrieve a parked call, but only KX-
UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users can put a call into a parking zone.
• The Call Park button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing red (for PT) : You or another extension has a call parked.
Flashing red (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670) : Another extension has a call parked.
Flashing green (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670) : You have a call parked.
• If you hear a reorder tone when retrieving a parked call, there is no held call. Confirm the stored parking zone number.
• After you park a call, you can perform other operations.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Call Park button or Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
When talking to one party while the other party is on hold, you can swap the calls back and forth
(alternately).
• KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users: You cannot leave the conversation and let the two remaining parties talk.
To alternate between the parties leaving one party on hold temporarily
PT/PS/KX-UT series/S-PS
During a conversation
Press
XFER
TRANSFER
C.Tone
.
(DSS)
OR extension no.
Press DSS or dial the other party's extension number .
XFER
Talk to the other party.
Press TRANSFER
For KX-UT670:
Press Swap .
.
Talk to the original party.
The other party will be on hold.
Operating Manual 71
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
SLT
During a conversation
OR
C.Tone
extension no.
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
Dial the other party's extension number .
Talk to the other party.
OR
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
Talk to the original party.
The other party will be on hold.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
Press HOLD .
C.Tone
extension no.
Dial the other party's extension number .
Talk to the other party.
Press HOLD .
Talk to the original party.
The other party will be on hold.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
During a conversation
Press HOLD .
C.Tone
extension no.
Dial the other party's extension number .
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press the flashing DN or S-CO .
Talk to the original party.
The other party will be on hold.
Talk to the other party.
Press HOLD .
This step can be omitted if Automatic
Call Hold is enabled on your telephone.
72 Operating Manual
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
To leave the conversation and then let the two parties talk
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER .
C.Tone
(DSS)
OR extension no.
Press DSS or dial the other party's extension number .
Talk to the other party.
Press TRANSFER .
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
C.Tone
extension no.
OR
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
Dial the other party's extension number .
Talk to the other party.
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
On-hook.
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
–
–
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
During a conversation, a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset occurs when an outside call has been received or another extension is letting you know a call is waiting. You must activate this feature to use it. (Default: Disable—No call [Intercom calls]/No tone [Outside calls])
You can answer the second call by disconnecting (1) or holding (2) the current call.
1. To disconnect the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series/S-PS
While hearing a tone
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the new party.
Operating Manual 73
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
2. To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS
While hearing a tone
Press HOLD .
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Talk to the new party.
Disregard this step if both parties are extensions.
Press CO , ICD Group , PDN ,
SDN , or INTERCOM .
SLT
While hearing a tone
Press Recall/hookswitch .
5 0
C.Tone
Enter 50.
Talk to the new party.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
While hearing a tone
Press HOLD .
C.Tone
Talk to the new party.
74 Operating Manual
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
While hearing a tone
Press HOLD .
C.Tone
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press the flashing DN , or S-CO .
Talk to the new party.
After talking to the new party (second call), you can disconnect (2.1) or hold (2.2) it and then retrieve the first call.
2.1 To disconnect the second call and then talk to the original party
PT/PS
During a conversation (CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the original party.
Press CO , ICD Group , PDN ,
SDN , or INTERCOM .
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD .
Talk to the original party.
Operating Manual 75
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
Off-hook.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press the flashing DN or S-CO .
Talk to the original party.
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
5 0
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Enter 50.
C.Tone
Talk to the original party.
2.2 To hold the second call and then talk to the original party
After holding it, you can talk to the original party. Then, you can disconnect it and then talk to the new party again.
76 Operating Manual
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Press HOLD .
Talk to the original party.
Disregard this step if both parties are extensions.
Press CO , ICD Group , PDN ,
SDN , or INTERCOM .
On-hook.
Off-hook.
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Press CO , ICD Group , PDN ,
SDN , or INTERCOM .
Talk to the new party.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
Press HOLD .
Talk to the original party.
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD .
Talk to the new party.
Operating Manual 77
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
During a conversation
Press HOLD .
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press the flashing DN or S-CO .
Talk to the original party.
On-hook.
Off-hook.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press the flashing DN or S-CO .
Talk to the new party.
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
5 0
Enter 50.
C.Tone
Talk to the original party.
On-hook.
Off-hook.
5 0
Enter 50.
C.Tone
Talk to the new party.
• Depending on the type of your telephone, you may be able to talk to the other party using the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]), or you can receive an announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA) if you are having a conversation using the handset.
Refer to "1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/
• The caller’s name or number is displayed for five seconds in fifteen second intervals while waiting to be answered.
78 Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
If you select "Tone 1", you will hear the same tone for Call Waiting from an outside party and an extension. If you select "Tone 2", you will hear different tones for Call Waiting from an outside party and an extension.
15 s
Default
(Tone 1)
5 s
Special Tones
(Tone 2)
OR
• Only tone 1 is available for KX-UT series SIP phones.
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
This is an optional telephone company service. You can receive a call waiting tone and the caller’s information. For details, consult your telephone company.
PT/PS/KX-UT series/S-PS
While hearing a tone
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
OR
(EFA)
6 0
Press TRANSFER or Recall/hookswitch .
Enter 60 .
Press FLASH/RECALL or EFA .
• To return to the original party, repeat the operation.
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone, KX-UT series SIP phone, or S-PS must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system programming.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
–
–
–
–
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
Leaving a Conference (Unattended Conference)
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Three-party Conference)
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call (Privacy Release)
Operating Manual 79
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
–
Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Three-party Conference
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
You can add one or more parties to your conversation.
• For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone and S-PS users:
When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button for the first time to establish a conference call, the DN/S-CO button for the call will turn off and a new DN button will light green for the conference call. Even if you add more parties, only the newly lit DN button is lit up for the call.
To establish a conference call
PT/PS
During a conversation
OR
Press CONF or TRANSFER .
desired phone no.
C.Tone
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press CONF .
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
KX-UT series/S-PS
During a conversation desired phone no.
C.Tone
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press CONFERENCE .
Talk with multiple parties.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start .
80 Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation desired phone no.
3
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press TRANSFER .
Enter 3 .
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation desired phone no.
3
C.Tone
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
Enter 3 .
Talk with multiple parties.
Operating Manual 81
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To establish a conference call when receiving a call from an outside party during a two-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Press HOLD .
Press the flashing
CO , PDN , or SDN .
Talk to the new party.
Press CONF or TRANSFER .
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
OR
3
C.Tone
Press the flashing CO , ICD Group ,
PDN , SDN , or INTERCOM corresponding to the original party.
Talk to the original party.
Press CONF, or press
TRANSFER and then enter 3 .
To add four or more parties to a conference
PT/PS/KX-UT series/S-PS
During a conversation
To continue desired phone no.
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
Press CONF .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk.
Press CONF .
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start .
Talk.
82 Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To add another party on hold to a conference
PT/PS
During a 3- to 7-party conference
Press CONF .
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press the flashing CO , ICD Group ,
PDN , or SDN corresponding to the party on hold.
Press CONF .
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
To talk to two parties alternately in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER .
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/hookswitch .
Operating Manual 83
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To disconnect one party and then talk to the other in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER once or twice to establish a conversation with the party to be disconnected.
Press FLASH/RECALL .*
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Talk.
The other party will be put on hold.
Press the flashing CO , ICD Group ,
PDN , SDN , or INTERCOM corresponding to the party on hold.
• * In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone must be set to Flash/
Recall mode through system programming.
• During a three-party conversation, pressing the TRANSFER button or Recall/hookswitch alternates between the other parties in the conversation.
• You can have a conference with a maximum of eight parties (comprising intercom or outside lines) simultaneously.
• During a conversation involving four or more parties, you cannot disconnect one party and maintain the conversation with the other parties.
• Non-KX-UT series SIP phone users cannot originate a conference call, but can be added as a member.
• When a KX-UT series SIP phone or S-PS user originates a conference call and one of the other parties leaves the conference, the KX-UT series SIP phone or S-PS user will still be able to talk to the remaining party but will not be able to hold the call.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Conference button.
Leaving a Conference (Unattended Conference)
The person who originated a conference can leave the conference, and allow the other parties to continue the conversation.
• KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users: If you originated a conference, you cannot leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. When you go onhook, the conference is terminated and the other parties are disconnected.
84 Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To leave a conference
PT/PS
During 3- to 7-party conference
Press CONF .
On-hook.
To return while others are talking
PT/PS
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Press flashing green CO , ICD Group , PDN , SDN , or INTERCOM .
To complete a conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
• Time limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone before a specified timeout. The originating extension user will hear an alarm tone before timeout. The call is disconnected when the timer runs out unless the originating extension returns to the conference.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Conference button.
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Three-party Conference)
The person who originated a conference with two other parties can leave the conference, and allow the other parties to continue the conversation.
Operating Manual 85
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To leave a conference involving at least one other extension
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series/S-PS
During a three-party conference
On-hook.
To leave a conference involving two outside parties
PT/PS
During a three-party conference
Press TRANSFER .
On-hook.
SLT
During a three-party conference
Press Recall/hookswitch .
On-hook.
• To leave a conference call involving two outside parties and have the conversation continue, your extension must be enabled to transfer calls to outside lines through COS programming.
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call (Privacy Release)
You can let a third party join your current outside call and establish a three-party conversation. You can also leave the conversation and then let the two other parties talk.
86 Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To let a third party join your conversation and establish a three-party conversation
PT/PS
Your extension (on the outside call)
(S-CO)
Press green
S-CO .
Other extension
The S-CO button will flash at all extensions that have that S-CO button.
Wait for an answer.
To prolong, press the S-CO again.
C.Tone
Talk.
A three-party conversation is now established.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press the flashing
S-CO within 5 seconds.
Off-hook.
Talk.
• Only an S-CO button can be used for this operation.
• You can leave a three-party conversation and let the two other parties talk by simply going on-hook.
Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Threeparty Conference [3PTY]—by ISDN)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(ISDN-Hold) desired phone no.
Press ISDN-Hold .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press CONF .
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
Operating Manual 87
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
6 2 desired phone no.
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER .
Enter 62 .
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press TRANSFER .
3
Enter 3 .
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation
6 2
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
C.Tone
Enter 62 .
desired phone no.
Dial desired phone number .
Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number.
Talk to the new party.
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
3
Enter 3 .
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
88 Operating Manual
1.4.6 Mute
To complete a conversation
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an ISDN-Hold button.
1.4.6 Mute
You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the handset.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation
OR
VOICE CALL
MUTE
Press MUTE .
OR
• The AUTO ANS/MUTE or VOICE CALL/MUTE button light for PTs, or the SP-PHONE button light for KX-UT series SIP phones shows the current status as follows:
Off: Normal
Flashing red: Mute
• If mute is used during OHCA, it will become Handset Mute.
• PS and S-PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook
Monitor)
You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker while continuing the conversation using the handset.
Operating Manual 89
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation using the handset
Press SP-PHONE .
• The SP-PHONE button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : The voice is heard through the handset.
On : The voice is heard through the speaker and the handset.
• This feature requires system programming.
• Hands-free operation
You can have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE button. You can perform other tasks simultaneously.
• Helpful hints for hands-free operation:
– If it is difficult to hear the other party’s voice,
Increase the volume using the Navigator Key or Volume Key.
– If the other party has difficulty hearing you,
Decrease the volume.
– If the other party reports that your voice echoes,
Use the telephone in a room that has curtains, carpeting or both.
– If parts of the conversation cannot be heard,
If you and the other party speak at the same time, parts of your conversation may be lost.
To avoid this, try to speak alternately.
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
You can have a conversation using a headset.
In this case, you must select "Headset on" in programming mode or set the Headset button on (red) in advance. However, for the KX-UT113/KX-UT123 and S-PS, Headset mode is enabled automatically when a headset is connected to the headset jack of the telephone.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
To talk using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Press SP-PHONE .
90 Operating Manual
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
To use the handset during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Off-hook.
To talk in hands-free mode during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Headset)
Press red Headset .
• The Headset button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : Headset mode off
Red on : Headset mode on
• This feature is not available for the KX-T7665.
• For KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248 telephone users:
– With KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248 telephones, you can use a Bluetooth wireless headset registered on your extension as a headset.
– Operating Distance
Please keep the telephones with connected Bluetooth Modules, 3 m or more apart from each other. Also, if a Bluetooth headset is in use near a telephone with a connected
Bluetooth Module, other than the one it is registered to, noise may be heard. Move away from the telephone and closer to the one it is registered to, to improve the signal.
– Noise
Signals are transmitted between this module and the Bluetooth headset using radio waves. For maximum distance and noise free operation, it is recommended that the module is situated away from electrical appliances such as faxes, radios, PCs, or microwaves.
• Systems using the 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere with this product. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN,
Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor noise.
Operating Manual 91
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
• For KX-UT248, KX-NT560, and Bluetooth-compatible S-PS telephone users:
– You may not be able to use all of the functionality available on a Bluetooth headset. For example, redialling will not work with a REDIAL button on a Bluetooth headset, and, during hands-free mode, you cannot switch the call to the Bluetooth headset through headset operation.
• For KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551), KX-DT543, KX-DT546, KX-UT133, KX-UT136,
KX-UT248, and KX-UT670 telephone users:
– You can use Electric Hook Switch (EHS) headsets. For the latest information about headsets that have been tested with this unit, consult your dealer.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Headset Operation
Select the equipment to use.
•
Create or edit a Headset button.
92 Operating Manual
1.5 Using a PDN/SDN Button
1.5 Using a PDN/SDN Button
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN) buttons are useful when extension users will handle calls for other extensions. For example, a secretary or multiple secretaries can handle calls and check the call status of a boss or multiple bosses. The functions of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:
PDN button: This button can be used to make and receive all calls (including both outside and intercom calls). Having multiple PDN buttons allows multiple calls to be queued at the extension. Extensions that have a PDN button are called PDN extensions.
SDN button: The light of an SDN button displays the current call status of the registered extension, similar to a DSS button. In addition, this button can be used to perform the following operations:
• call the PDN extension (
• answer calls ringing at the PDN extension
•
hold calls and retrieve calls held by the PDN extension ( Call Hold and Call
•
transfer calls to the PDN extension ( Call Transfer Using SDN Button)
Extensions that have an SDN button are called SDN extensions.
• The extension that is registered as the destination of an SDN button must have at least one
PDN button.
• One extension can have up to 8 PDN buttons.
• An extension can have only one SDN button for each PDN extension.
• The button light of each PDN/SDN button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Off
Green on
Flashing green slowly
Flashing green moderately
Flashing green rapidly
Red on
PDN Button Status
The PDN extension is idle.
SDN Button Status
The extension is on a call using the PDN button.
A call is on hold at the PDN extension
(Regular Hold).
The extension is on a call using an
SDN button.
A call answered with the SDN button is on hold (Regular Hold).
A call is on hold temporarily or on Exclusive
Call Hold.
The PDN extension is receiving an incoming call.
A corresponding SDN extension is using the line.
A call answered with the SDN button is on hold temporarily or on Exclusive
Call Hold.
An SDN extension is receiving a Hold
Recall or callback ringing from a call answered with the SDN button.
The corresponding PDN extension or another corresponding SDN extension is using the line.
Operating Manual 93
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Light Pattern
Flashing red slowly
PDN Button Status
A corresponding SDN extension is holding a call.
SDN Button Status
Another corresponding SDN extension, or the PDN extension itself, is holding a call.
The corresponding PDN extension is receiving an incoming call.
Flashing red rapidly
The PDN extension is receiving an incoming call to an incoming call distribution (ICD) group.
SDN Direct Dial
Using an SDN button, you can easily call the corresponding PDN extension. SDN buttons are in one of two modes depending on system programming, and the operation procedure differs as follows:
Enhanced DSS Key Mode
PT/PS
Off-hook.
(SDN)
Press corresponding
SDN .
Standard SDN Key Mode
PT/PS
Talk.
Off-hook.
(SDN)
Press corresponding
SDN .
D.Tone
(SDN)
Press the SDN again.
Talk.
• When performing SDN Direct Dial to call the corresponding PDN extension, the SDN button light shows the current status of the destination extension as follows:
Green on : You are using the line.
Red on : The line is being used. (The PDN extension, or another SDN extension when multiple extensions have SDN buttons to a same PDN extension, is using the line.)
• Even if a PDN extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), you can call the extension as normal by pressing the SDN button.
• When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you can dial a telephone number while hearing a dial tone, instead of pressing the SDN button again. Depending on system programming, your call will be made using either your normal calling privileges (Class of
Service) or those of the corresponding PDN extension ( SDN Walking COS ).
Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve
You can put calls answered with a PDN or SDN button on hold normally (→ 1.4.2 Holding a Call ).
94 Operating Manual
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
You can also retrieve a call held at your extension/another extension with a simple operation, regardless of the call type.
Call Hold Retrieve
PT/PS
To retrieve a call at the holding extension
Off-hook.
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press flashing green
PDN or SDN .
Talk.
To retrieve a call from another extension—only Regular Hold
Off-hook.
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press flashing red
PDN or SDN .
Talk.
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time , you will hear an alarm as a reminder
(Hold Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold automatically by pressing another PDN button to make or answer another call.
Call Transfer Using SDN Button
You can transfer a call to a PDN extension with a simple operation using a corresponding SDN button.
Operating Manual 95
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
To transfer a call to a PDN extension
PT/PS
During a conversation
(SDN)
*
Press SDN .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
• System programming is required to use this feature during a conversation with an extension.
• * When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you have to press the SDN button twice to transfer the call, unless you used that SDN button to answer an incoming call.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
•
Create or edit a Primary Directory Number (PDN) or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button.
96 Operating Manual
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
–
–
–
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
You can have your incoming calls forwarded to a specified destination.
All Calls:
All calls are forwarded. Preset extensions may also forward from their own receiving group.
Busy:
All calls are forwarded when your extension is busy.
No Answer:
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer the call within a specified time period.
Busy/No Answer (BSY/NA):
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer within a specified time period or when your extension is busy.
Follow Me (From):
If you fail to set the above-mentioned "All Calls" to forward before you leave your desk, you can set the same feature from the destination extension.
• Incoming calls can be forwarded up to four times.
• You can set the UM group’s floating extension number as a forward destination.
• You can set your cellular phone as the forward destination.
• Boss & Secretary feature
The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension.
<Example>
Call
Forwarding extension
Forward set destination
Operating Manual 97
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7
Enter 71 .
1
0
OR
1
OR
2
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
destination extension no.
OR outside line access no.
outside phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number .
Or enter outside line access number and then outside phone number .
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
0
2
3
4
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number .
For "Cancel", go on-hook directly after entering 0.
To set Follow Me from another extension
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
7
Enter 71 .
1
0
OR
1
OR
2
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
7
8
Follow Me
Follow Me Cancel
Enter 7 or 8 .
your extension no.
Dial your extension number .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Call Forwarding by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the
FWD/DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Call
Forwarding for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone.
For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
98 Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 1 3
Enter 713 . time
Enter time
( seconds [2 digits]).
C.Tone
On-hook.
To set/cancel (Call Forwarding [FWD] for your Incoming Call Distribution Group)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
7 1
4
OR
5
OR
6
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 4 to 6 as you desire.
1
OR
0
Set
Cancel
ICD Group extension no.
Off-hook.
Enter 71 .
Enter 1 to set or 0 to cancel.
Enter ICD Group extension number .
For "Cancel", go on-hook directly after entering ICD
Group extension number.
destination extension no.
OR outside line access no.
outside phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number .
Or enter outside line access number and then outside phone number .
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
• The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : Both features are not set.
Red on : FWD mode
Flashing red slowly : DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
• The Group FWD button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : No set
Red on : FWD mode
Operating Manual 99
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
• The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown below:
FWD DND Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
Note
A FWD/DND button (customised button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the mode cannot be changed.
• Transferred outside calls are also forwarded to the destination assigned for outside calls.
• When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (forwarding type, forward destination), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls and FWD/DND—Intercom calls, and/or Group FWD—Outside calls and Group FWD—
Intercom calls, because: a.
the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button
[fixed button]) and the Group FWD—Both calls button will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercom calls, but not both.
Note
The FWD icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b.
pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group FWD—Both calls button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons, or Group FWD
(Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT), you can easily switch the FWD status of another phone. First, the extension that will allow remote forwarding operation must specify an extension to perform remote forwarding. Then, the extension to perform remote forwarding can assign a Group FWD button for this purpose. The forwarding status of the target extension can be checked via the LED of the button. This feature allows users to forward calls to themselves from another extension.
100 Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set/cancel (Remote FWD setting)
PT
While on-hook
(Group FWD)
The forwarding status of the target extension changes accordingly.
Press Group FWD .
On the other extension
FWD status changed remotely
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit Group FWD (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can easily switch the FWD/DND status, and set the forward destination for outside/intercom calls with the FWD/DND button (fixed button). For PT users, it is also possible to set outside telephone numbers (e.g., your cellular phone) as forward destinations for up to 4 Virtual PSs* in an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group, to ring together with other ICD Group members for calls to the group.
The following settings are available:
• Switching the FWD/DND status and setting FWD destination for outside/intercom calls
• Timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
• Forwarding status (on/off) and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls for up to 4 virtual
PSs in an ICD Group
* Virtual PS
A virtual PS is a dedicated extension number assigned to a non-existent portable station
(PS) to allow access to outside destinations such as a cellular phone.
3 Talk
2 Forward to outside destination
Virtual PS
(Extn. No. 301)
Extn. 101
1 Dials 301
• For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To set and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
Operating Manual 101
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To switch FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND button again to switch the status.
To switch FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
2
Enter 2 .
The current FWD/DND status for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND button again to switch the status.
• When you switch the FWD/DND status, any FWD destination that was set previously is not cleared.
102 Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
1
OR
2
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
*
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 1 or 2 .
Press STORE .
2
3
4
5
FWD–All Calls
FWD–Busy
FWD–No Answer
FWD–Busy/No Answer
Enter 2 to 5 .
0
1
FWD/DND off
DND on
Enter 0 or 1 .
OR destination extension no.
OR outside line access no.
outside phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number, or outside line access number and then outside phone number .
• * This step can be omitted.
Press STORE to set.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
Operating Manual 103
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
FWD/DND Off : FWD/DND off
Do Not Disturb : DND on
OR
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
FWD(All)
FWD(NA)
: FWD–All Calls
FWD(BSY) : FWD–Busy
: FWD–No Answer
FWD(B/NA) : FWD–Busy/No Answer
Press UP or DOWN with the Navigator Key to select the desired item.
destination extension no.
OR outside line access no.
outside phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number, or outside line access number and then outside phone number .
#
Enter # .
Press ENTER to set.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
3
Enter 3 .
Press STORE .
time
*
Enter time
( seconds [0–120]).
Press STORE to set.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
• * You can enter the time as a 1–3 digit number. For example, 15 seconds can be entered as
"15" or "015".
104 Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set forwarding status and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls to an ICD Group
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
4
5
6
7
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Virtual PS 4
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 4 to 7 .
Press STORE .
To set ringing
1 FWD–All Calls
Enter 1 .
To cancel ringing
0 FWD off
Enter 0 .
OR outside line access no.
outside phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter outside line access number and then outside phone number .
Press STORE to set.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
• Only one extension assigned as member 1 in each ICD group can perform the settings for virtual PSs.
• It is possible to switch the forwarding status (on/off) of a virtual PS by entering the number
(4–7) of that extension, then pressing the fixed FWD/DND button, instead of pressing the
AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
All calls are forwarded to an outside party using ISDN. The following types of call forwarding are provided by the ISDN service.
– Unconditional (Call Forwarding Unconditional [CFU])
– When your extension is busy (Call Forwarding Busy [CFB])
– When you do not answer (Call Forwarding No Reply [CFNR])
Operating Manual 105
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)
To set
PT/SLT/PS
7 5
Off-hook.
#
Enter # .
Enter 7 5 .
2
3
4
Unconditional
Busy
No Reply
Enter required number .
outside line no.
#
Enter outside line number (3 digits).
Enter # . desired phone no.
# your MSN
Enter your multiple subscriber number
(MSN) .
C.Tone
Enter desired phone number .
Enter # . On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
7
Enter 7 5 .
5 outside line no.
#
Enter outside line number (3 digits).
Enter # . your MSN
Enter your multiple subscriber number
(MSN) .
# 0
C.Tone
Enter # . Enter 0 . On-hook.
To confirm the condition
PT/PS
Off-hook.
#
Enter # .
7
Enter 7 5 .
5
1
Enter 1 .
C.Tone
outside line no.
#
Enter outside line number (3 digits).
The display shows the selected type.
Enter # . your MSN
Enter your multiple subscriber number
(MSN) .
On-hook.
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display
(Absent Message)
You can show the reason you do not answer, if the caller uses a Panasonic display proprietary telephone.
There are eight preprogrammed messages and one for your personal message (16 characters). The selected message is shown on the display of your telephone. For callers using KX-UT series SIP phones or
S-PSs, the message will not be shown on their display.
106 Operating Manual
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)
Message no.
1
2
3
8
9
6
7
4
5
#
Message (Example)
Will Return Soon
Gone Home
At Ext %%%% (Extension number)
Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
In a Meeting
A message assigned for each extension.
(Personal Absent Message)
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 5 0
Enter 750 .
8
9
4
5
6
7
1 Will Return Soon
2
3
Gone Home
At Ext %%%% +
Back at %%:%% +
Out until %%/%% +
In a Meeting
Extension no.
Hour : Minute
Month / Day
Enter required number .
C.Tone
Enter # . On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 5 0
Enter 750 .
0
Enter 0 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• Enter the desired value in the "%" positions. You must enter the correct number of characters as represented by the "%" using 0 to 9 or .
• The preprogrammed messages can be changed through system programming.
•
To create your personal message (Message no. 9), refer to "3.1.2 Settings on the
Operating Manual 107
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock)
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone
(Extension Dial Lock)
You can lock your extension so that other users cannot make unauthorised outside calls.
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
To lock
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 7
Enter 77 .
1
Enter 1 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
To unlock
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
7 7
Enter 77 .
0
Enter 0 . extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
• If you forget the extension PIN or cannot unlock your extension, consult your manager.
He can clear your extension PIN. Then, you can set the new PIN and unlock your extension by entering it.
• If your extension is locked by this feature, it cannot perform features as follows:
– Making outside calls
– Changing the call forwarding destination
• If you do not set extension PIN, you cannot lock and unlock your extension.
To make an outside call while your extension is locked
PT/SLT/PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
4 7
Enter 47 . your extension no.
Dial your extension number .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
desired phone no.
Dial desired phone number.
If the wrong extension PIN is entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number.
108 Operating Manual
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock)
• After you make an outside call, Extension Dial Lock is automatically activated again.
Operating Manual 109
1.7 Making/Answering an Announcement
1.7 Making/Answering an Announcement
1.7.1 Paging
–
–
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Group Paging
You can make a voice announcement to proprietary telephones or external speakers or both in the preset group simultaneously.
To page
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
3
Enter 33 .
3 paging group no.
Dial paging group number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Announce.
Wait for an answer.
Talk.
• If the group which you paged is already being used for paging, you hear a busy tone.
Paging and then Transferring a Call
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
OR
OR 3 3
Enter 33 .
Press TRANSFER or Recall/hookswitch .
The other party is placed on hold.
Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Announce.
paging group no.
Dial paging group number (2 digits).
Talk.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension are connected and start a conversation.
110 Operating Manual
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
SIP Extn./S-PS
During a conversation
XFER
OR
OR
HOLD
KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press TRANSFER .
Other than KX-UT series and S-PS:
Press HOLD .
The other party is placed on hold.
3
Enter 33 .
3 paging group no.
Dial paging group number (2 digits).
Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Announce.
Talk.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension are connected and start a conversation.
• After you go on-hook, the caller can talk to the person who answers the page.
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
To answer
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
4 3
C.Tone
Enter 43 .
Talk.
KX-UT series dial key
Press any dial key (0–9, , #) .
Talk.
Operating Manual 111
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
To allow/deny a paging announcement (Paging Deny)
PT/KX-UT series
Off-hook.
7 2 1
Enter 721 .
1
OR
0
Deny
Allow
Enter 1 or 0 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• The following are extensions that cannot receive a paging announcement:
– Portable station
– Single line telephone
– Proprietary telephone that is ringing or busy
– Proprietary telephone in Paging Deny mode
– Proprietary telephone in DND mode
– Non-KX-UT series SIP phone
– SIP-CS compatible Portable Station
• System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to receive paging announcements.
• Even if the announcement is not paging your extension, you can answer it, if it is paging your group.
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
You can call multiple parties, assigned as members of a group (conference group), and establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties. You can make a conference group call to both extensions and outside lines (including analogue lines). The following two modes are available:
• Conference Mode:
the called parties can join the conversation automatically. ( Conference Mode)
• Broadcast Mode: the called parties can hear the caller’s voice announcement, and then be allowed to
join the conversation by the caller. ( Broadcast Mode)
• If you dial a conference group number that is in use for another conversation, you will hear a busy tone and cannot establish a multiple party conversation.
• If you fail to seize idle outside lines necessary for all members assigned in the conference group, you will hear a reorder tone and cannot make a conference group call.
• When making a conference group call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will
be the one you select for making calls to an outside line. Refer to "1.9.4 Displaying Your
Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])".
Conference Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the called parties can join the conversation simply by going off-hook. The caller can end the conversation with a specific party manually.
112 Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Caller
3 2 conference
group no.
Off-hook.
Enter 32 .
Dial conference group number
(1 digit).
Enter # .
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone rings.
Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Talk.
A multiple party conversation is now established.
Talk.
entry code
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
• * If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/ outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
• Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used as an entry code, no one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to " Join After Time Out".
• A conversation can be established with a maximum of 8 parties (including the caller).
• If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
• With PTs and KX-WT125 (Canada only)/KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/KX-
TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group call can be automatically answered without going off-hook. This mode is selected through system programming.
• If using an SLT, SIP phone, or S-PS, the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
To end a conversation with a specific party
Operating Manual 113
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS .
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER .
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL .
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system programming.
Broadcast Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the caller can call multiple parties in a conference group, make a voice announcement, and then establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties.
This conversation will be heard by all called parties. Called parties can listen to the announcement simply by going off-hook. They can send a notification tone if they want to join the conversation.
114 Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Caller
3 2 conference
group no.
Off-hook.
Enter 32 .
Dial conference group number
(1 digit).
Enter # .
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone rings.
Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Announce.
entry code
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
• * If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/ outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
• Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used as an entry code, no one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to " Join After Time Out".
• With PTs and KX-WT125 (Canada only)/KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/KX-
TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group call can be automatically answered without going off-hook. This mode is selected through system programming.
• If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
• If using an SLT, SIP phone, or S-PS, the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
To make a conversation with a specific party
Operating Manual 115
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
PT/PS
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS .
To make a conversation with a party in the group’s preassigned order
PT/PS
During an announcement
Press CONF .
To end a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS .
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER .
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL .
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system programming.
• If the maximum number of parties who can actively participate in the conversation is set to
32 through system programming, the keys on the conference originator’s telephone (DSS,
CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, FLASH, etc.) will not function.
116 Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
For a called extension
To send a notification tone to the caller and join a conversation
PT/SLT/PS
Called Party
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS corresponding to the caller.
OR Wait for reply.
Talk.
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
PT/PS
Caller
During an announcement
A notification tone occurs, and the display shows the called party's information.
(DSS)
Press corresponding
DSS .
Talk.
Introduce the called party to the conversation.
• A maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conference. Also, depending on system settings, a maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conversation.
• Push-to-Talk for PT/PS/SLT users
If the Broadcast Mode and this mode are selected through system programming, the called
PT/PS/SLT users can join the conversation by pressing any dial key (0–9, , #) during the voice announcement.
By assigning PSs with the Hands-free Answerback feature enabled to a conference group, the caller can create a wireless paging system. All of the called PS users, with the Handsfree Answerback feature enabled, will hear the voice announcement. Then, any PS user can respond by pressing any dial key, and their reply will be heard by all of the called parties.
Join After Time Out
Extensions or outside telephones can join the multiple party conversation that has been already started using this feature. For example, if the conference group members fail to answer when a conference group call is made, they can join the multiple party conversation later using this feature. They can join the conversation from outside telephones (through DISA or TIE Line) or extensions. This feature is available for both modes: Conference Mode and Broadcast Mode.
Operating Manual 117
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
For security reasons, you can set a specific entry code for the conference group call. To join the conversation, extensions/outside telephones have to enter the same entry code. Therefore, you have to inform the parties to be added to the conversation of the entry code in advance.
For an extension originating the conversation
To make a conference group call with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS entry code
*
Off-hook.
3 2
Enter 32 .
conference
group no.
Dial conference group number (1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Talk.
Enter # .
For an extension joining the conversation
To join a conversation with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
3 2
Enter 32 .
Enter # . conference
group no.
entry code
Dial conference group number (1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
*
Enter # .
C.Tone
Talk.
118 Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
• * If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/ outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
• Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used as an entry code, no one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you may not combine it with numeric digits).
• When you are using an outside telephone (through DISA or TIE Line), it is possible to join the conversation after accessing your extension using Walking COS.
• Extensions/outside telephones can join the conversation using this feature only when the conference group call has already been established between the extension originating a conversation and at least one member.
• To join a conversation that is already in progress, extensions/outside telephones must be using an idle extension with no held calls.
• If a conversation has reached the maximum number of participants, this feature cannot be used to join the conversation.
• Starting a Conference Group Call using Hands-free Answerback
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled with at least one conference group member, the call can be automatically answered and the conversation begins with only one participant (the caller). Then, up to 6 participants can use the Join After Time Out feature to join the conversation.
Operating Manual 119
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
1.8.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
Introduction to the Unified Messaging system
Your PBX can provide you with Unified Messaging system service. You or an outside party can access the
Unified Messaging system from a telephone. As the owner of a mailbox, you can:
• Send a message to one or more people inside or outside your office.
• Receive and print fax messages.
• Transfer messages to other subscribers and add your own comments.
• Access your mailbox and listen to your messages, even when out of the office.
• Have the Unified Messaging system call or e-mail you when someone leaves you a message.
• Be notified by the message waiting lamp on your extension when new messages have been recorded in your mailbox.
• Screen your calls.
• Create a set of options and functions exclusive to your mailbox (Personal Custom Service) that can be selected by your callers.
• Voice, fax, and e-mail messages can be managed via an e-mail client that supports IMAP4.
• Many other useful messaging features.
• PBX users who are assigned a mailbox in the Unified Messaging system are called subscribers.
• Hospitality Mode:
If your service mode is set to "Hospitality Mode", available features such as listening to messages, personal greetings, etc. may be limited according to the COS settings for your mailbox.
Before You Begin
In order to use the Unified Messaging system as a subscriber, you need to know the following information.
The System Manager can help you if you do not know this information.
• The extension number that you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system.
• Your mailbox number and extension number (In many cases these are the same number, but it is possible they are not).
• Your mailbox password (if set).
• The System Manager’s telephone number. The System Manager is the person you should refer to when you have any problems with the Unified Messaging system.
Prompts
Prompts are recorded voice guidance messages that help you set and use Unified Messaging system features. Prompts also help callers when the system is handing their calls. Depending on how your Unified
Messaging system is programmed, subscribers and callers can select the language they prefer for system prompts.
<Prompt example>
"To leave a message, press 1."
"Please leave a message at the tone."
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features."
120 Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• Not all prompts are described in each operation.
• The prompts in each operation are not exactly the same as the actual prompts you will hear from the Unified Messaging system.
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time
The first time you log in to your mailbox, there are certain mailbox settings you should perform before using any other Subscriber Services. These settings identify you as the owner of your mailbox, and are described
in " Logging in to Your Mailbox".
• Password
• Subscriber’s Name
• Personal Greeting Messages
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to initiate a "Subscriber Tutorial" the first time you log in to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you through the mailbox configuration process.
Logging in to Your Mailbox
In order to access Subscriber Services (to play messages, change mailbox settings, etc.), you must first log in to your mailbox. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox:
Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary when logging in to your mailbox using someone else’s extension, or when
Automatic Log-in is not enabled for your mailbox.
Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox from your own extension, you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number.
• The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
Operating Manual 121
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• Mailbox Capacity Warning
When your mailbox is almost full, you will receive a Mailbox Capacity Warning shortly after logging in to your mailbox. When you hear a Mailbox Capacity Warning, you should delete unnecessary messages to make more recording time in your mailbox available. The amount of recording time that remains when you hear the Mailbox Capacity Warning depends on how your mailbox is configured. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
OR
# 6
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
UM group’s floating extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer , or enter UM group’s floating extension number .
your mailbox no.
Enter #6 .
your password #
Enter and your mailbox number .
Enter your password and # .
You can skip this step if your mailbox requires no password.
Enter your mailbox.
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
UM group’s floating extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer , or enter UM group’s floating extension number .
your password #
Enter your password and # .
You can skip this step if your mailbox requires no password.
Enter your mailbox.
122 Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not allowed access to your extension.
• When following audible prompts only: if Autoplay New Messages is enabled for your mailbox, new messages will be played back automatically each time you log in to your mailbox. Whether or not new messages will be played back one after the other automatically depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• If Message Waiting Lamp is enabled for your mailbox, the message lamp on your telephone will light when you receive a new message. You can log in to your mailbox and play back a new message automatically simply by going off-hook and pressing the Message button on your telephone. The Unified Messaging system will play back the first new message only. To play back other messages, press the appropriate button.
• After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox settings and Class of Service (COS) settings of your mailbox.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to present a "Subscriber Tutorial" to you the first time you log in to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you through the mailbox configuration process. Simply by following the prompts, you can configure the following items. You can configure these items later manually if necessary, as explained later in this section. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
• You may be asked to enter your password after logging in to your mailbox. If you do not know this password, ask your System Administrator.
• The subscriber tutorial may be simplified or not available depending on your COS settings.
Password:
If your mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox. Your password can contain up to 16 digits.
Subscriber’s Name:
This is a recording of your name. Other subscribers will hear your name when they listen to messages you left for them. It may also be heard by callers when they use the Dialling by Name feature.
Operating Manual 123
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
Personal Greetings:
The following Personal Greeting Messages can be recorded in the subscriber tutorial. After the greeting is played, a tone will sound, and the caller can leave a message.
• No Answer Greeting: Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be, "This is (name). I can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting: Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I’m on another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting: Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common example might be, "This is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
• If you do not record a greeting message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
124 Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To start the Subscriber Tutorial
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
The Unified Messaging system will announce,
"Welcome to the Panasonic Unified Messaging
System. This is the Subscriber Tutorial service.".
To set your password for the first time your password #
Enter your password and # .
2
Enter 2 to accept.
OR
To change your password
1
Enter 1 .
your new password #
Enter your new password and # .
To record the Owner’s Name
(Your Subscriber Name)
C.Tone
State your name.
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To record your greeting messages
C.Tone
Record your greeting message.
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
1
2
3
4
Review
Accept
Record the message again
Add
Delete and exit
Enter the desired option .
To confirm the settings
1
Enter 1 .
On-hook.
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Operating Manual 125
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
After callers reach your mailbox, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record 6 kinds of
Personal Greetings; the appropriate greeting will be played for callers. If you delete or do not record a greeting message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
• No Answer Greeting:
Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be, "This is (name). I can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting:
Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be, "This is (name). I’m on another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting:
Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
• Personal Greeting for Caller ID:
Heard by callers from preprogrammed telephone numbers. For details, refer to " for Caller ID".
• Temporary Greeting:
A special greeting that, if recorded, is heard by callers instead of the other greetings. A common example might be, "This is (name). I’m out of the office this week…".
• Absent Message:
Heard by callers when a personal greeting is set to a PBX’s absent message, and that absent message is currently set.
126 Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To record or delete your Personal Greeting Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 1
Enter 41 .
3
4
1
2
5
6
No Answer Greeting
Busy Signal Greeting
After Hours Greeting
Caller ID Greeting
Temporary Greeting
OR
Absent Message
Greeting caller ID greeting no.
absent message no.
Select the desired greeting . When you select "Caller ID Greeting", enter a Caller ID Greeting Number (1–4). When you select "Absent
Message Greeting", enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
For Caller ID Greeting, refer to
" Personal Greetings for Caller ID ".
1 Change the greeting
OR
3 Delete the selected greeting
Follow the prompts as necessary.
C.Tone
Record your greeting message.*
The greeting will be deleted; go on-hook to finish.
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
1
2
3
4
Review
Accept
Rerecord the greeting message (repeat the steps above as necessary)
Add to the greeting message you just recorded
Delete the greeting message and exit
Follow the prompts as necessary.
3
4
1
2
5
6
No Answer Greeting
Busy Signal Greeting
After Hours Greeting
Caller ID Greeting
Temporary Greeting
Absent Message Greeting
Record or delete other greeting messages as necessary by following the prompts, or go on-hook.
If you go on-hook without accepting your new greeting, it will not be saved.
On-hook.
• The contents of the Absent Message Greeting prompt and the absent message displayed
on telephones (refer to "1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display
(Absent Message)") should be programmed to match through system programming.
Operating Manual 127
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• * We recommend stating your name in your greeting messages, so that callers will know they have reached the correct mailbox.
• A Temporary Personal Greeting is played instead of all your other greetings until it is deleted. Each time you log in to your mailbox, the Unified Messaging system will ask you if you want to turn off (delete) your Temporary Personal Greeting.
• Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access Record No Answer
Greeting, Record Busy Greeting, Record After Hours Greeting and Record Temporary
Greeting features directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to
"Automatic log-in"). For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult
your System Administrator.
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
You can record personalised greetings for specific callers. If you have assigned their telephone numbers
(Caller ID numbers) to a personalised greeting, they will hear the appropriate greeting when they call you, instead of your other greeting messages normally played for callers.
You can record 4 personalised greetings and assign 8 callers to each greeting. Record your personalised greetings before assigning Caller ID numbers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
To record a personalised greeting for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 1 4
Enter 414 . personalised greeting no.
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
STEP A
1
C.Tone
Record your greeting message.
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
OR
To assign Caller ID Numbers to the personalised greeting, go to STEP B in " To assign
Caller ID numbers for the first time ".
To change a personalised greeting
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
1
3
4 1 4 personalised greeting no.
Enter 414 . Enter
Change the greeting, then go to STEP A in " To record a personalised greeting for the first time ".
OR
Delete the greeting.
the personalised greeting number (1–4).
On-hook.
128 Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To assign Caller ID numbers for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4
STEP B caller ID no.
#
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number,
20 digits max.) and # .
*
1
Enter 414 .
4
2
Enter 2 to accept. personalised greeting no.
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
To continue
1
2
Add another caller ID number.
OR
End
Enter 1 or 2 .
On-hook.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
• * While entering a Caller ID number, you can press to enter a "wild card". This allows several telephone numbers to match the Caller ID number that you assigned. For example, if you store the Caller ID number as "012 … " (enter the number of s as required for telephone numbers in your area), any telephone number that begins with "012" (for example, all callers from the "012" area code) will hear your personalised greeting.
To add/delete/review Caller ID numbers later
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 1 4
Enter 414 .
1
2
3
Add a Caller ID number, then go to STEP B in " To assign Caller
ID numbers for the first time ".
OR
Delete a Caller ID number.
OR
Review all assigned Caller ID numbers, then go on-hook to finish.
Enter the desired option .
1
2
Delete the announced number.
OR
Keep the number and announce the next number, then repeat this step.
Enter 1 or 2 .
personalised greeting no.
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
2
Delete all numbers, then go on-hook to finish.
OR
Delete one number.
OR
Enter 1 or 2 .
On-hook.
Changing Your Password
You can protect your mailbox by setting a password to prevent unauthorised access to your mailbox. If your mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox.
Your password can contain up to 16 digits. You can change your password at any time. When choosing a password, avoid using obvious number combinations. If you forget your password, have your System
Administrator or System Manager clear your password. You may then set a new one.
Operating Manual 129
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To change your password
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 2 1
Enter 421 . your desired password
#
Enter the desired password and # .
2
Enter 2 to accept. On-hook.
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
You can record your name in the Unified Messaging system. The system can then announce your name for callers to let them know that they have reached the correct mailbox.
To change/delete your subscriber name
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 3 1
Enter 431 .
C.Tone
Enter 433 to delete your subscriber name, then go on-hook to finish.
1
State your name.
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to accept. On-hook.
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Commands for Changing the Current Unified Messaging System Service
After going off-hook and pressing the MESSAGE button
, Voice Mail Transfer button, or enter the UM group’s floating extension number, you can enter a service command to access certain Unified Messaging system features quickly. While guidance is being provided, you can also use service commands to, for example, switch to a different Unified Messaging system service mode.
*1
For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users: When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
130 Operating Manual
# 1
# 2
#
#
5
6
# 7
# 8
# 9
0
# #
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Dialling by Name
Custom Service
You will be guided to enter a Custom Service number (1–200).
Log in
Voice Mail Service
You can record a message for another subscriber by entering his or her mailbox number when guided. You can also log in to your mailbox by entering this command followed by and your mailbox number.
Restart (Return to Main Menu)
Automated Attendant Service
Exit
Return to Previous Menu
Help
Switch Service mode
If you are authorised to access a System Manager and/or Message Manager mailbox by the System Administrator, you can switch between those services as follows:
Subscriber service Message Manager service System Manager service
*1
*2
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will be prompted to enter the desired mailbox number.
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will return to the Subscriber Service Main Menu.
• Commands #5 and #7 are available only after you have accessed Subscriber Service.
• Some commands may not be available depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
When Using Voice Prompts
The following commands can be used to help you navigate through Unified Messaging system menus.
Takes you back to the previous menu.
Repeats the current menu.
0
# 7
Takes you back to the Main Menu.
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
–
–
–
–
–
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
Operating Manual 131
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
–
–
Playing Messages
Callers and other subscribers can leave voice messages for you, and you can play them back later after you have logged in to your mailbox. Also, when you receive a fax message, you can play back any attached voice messages or message envelopes, and print the fax.
Messages in your mailbox are divided into 3 types:
• New Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have not played back yet.
• Old Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have played back but have not yet deleted.
• Deleted Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have deleted. You can "recover" your deleted messages, after which
they will be treated as old messages (refer to " Recovering Deleted Messages"). If you do not
recover deleted messages, they will be permanently deleted at the end of the day.
When playing back a message, the Unified Messaging system can also announce the message’s
"envelope"—the date and time of the message, and the message sender’s information.
To play messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
1
3
9 1
New messages
Old messages
Deleted messages
Enter 1 , 3 or 91 .
1
2
#
Voice messages
*
Fax message envelopes
All messages
Follow the prompts as necessary.
Listen to the message.
Pressing during message playback will return you to the previous menu.
You can then select another message type to listen to.
• * This step is omitted depending on settings and COS settings of your mailbox.
• Fax features may not be available depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
Additional features are available during/after the playback of voice messages and fax message envelopes.
Refer to the table below and press the appropriate dialling key. The message types that can be used with each key a marked with a ü . Note that certain features are not available depending on the message type
(new, old, deleted).
Key Feature
New
Message Type
Old Deleted
1
Repeat this message
ü ü ü
1 1
Replay the previous message
ü ü ü
2
Play the next message
ü ü ü
132 Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Key Feature
New
Message Type
Old Deleted
(+
3
1
)
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 4
8 5
8 6
9
#
Delete this message
• If a confirmation message is played, press 1 to delete the message.
Recover this message
Reply to this message
Transfer this message
Play the message envelope
<During playback only>
Rewind the voice message
<After listening to a fax message envelope only>
Print the fax message
<During playback only>
Pause/restart message playback
<During playback only>
Increase playback volume
<During voice message playback only>
Set a Bookmark for the voice message
• To restart message playback, press 8 .
<For voice messages only>
Start playback at the Bookmark for the voice message
<During playback only>
Fast-forward
Save this message as new
• After saving the message, the next message will be played.
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
*1 These keys only available when the appropriate COS settings are assigned to your mailbox. For more information, consult your
System Administrator.
ü
ü
Operating Manual 133
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
• For voice messages, Unified Messaging system programming determines if the message envelope is played before each message, after each message, or only when you press 6 .
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• The Unified Messaging system will automatically delete both new and old messages after a specified number of days have passed. Your System Administrator or System Manager controls how many days messages are retained for. Each time you play a new or old message, the message retention counter resets.
• During playback, you can increase the playback volume by pressing 84 . If volume is at the highest setting, pressing 84 will select the lowest setting, as shown below.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
(default)
Level 4 Level 5
Printing Fax Messages
You can print faxes received in your mailbox when you play back a fax message envelope. Also, you can set
Automatic Delivery to immediately print any faxes received in your mailbox to a specified fax machine.
To print a fax message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
After listening to the fax message envelope
7
Enter 7 .
1
2
3
Print this fax message
Print all unprinted fax messages
Print all fax messages
Enter 1 , 2 or 3 .
To print from a specified fax machine fax no.
# fax no.
#
Enter the fax number and # .
OR
Enter the fax number and # again to confirm.
To print from the default fax machine
#
Enter # .
This step can be omitted depending on your mailbox settings.
OR
To print from the fax machine you are using now
(when calling from a fax machine with telephone handset)
0 #
Enter 0# .
The fax is sent to the fax machine.
On-hook.
134 Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To set Automatic Delivery
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 7
Enter 47 .
Go to "To change Automatic Delivery status" or "To set default fax number" .
To change Automatic Delivery status
1
Enter 1 .
Current status is announced.
1
Enter 1 to change.
The new status is announced.
On-hook.
To set default fax number
2
Enter 2 .
The fax number is announced if a default fax number has been assigned.
The new fax number
is announced.
1
Enter 1 to change.
* fax no.
Enter the fax number , and wait.
2
Enter 2 to accept. On-hook.
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits, press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
•
To clear the default fax number, please use Web Maintenance Console (refer to " Automatic
Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ] " in "
Maintenance Console" in "3.2.1 User Programming").
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
While listening to a message in your mailbox, you can set a bookmark. A bookmark lets you easily resume playback from a specific point in a specific message later. You can set one bookmark for each message in your mailbox; if you set a new bookmark, the old one is deleted.
• You cannot set or use bookmarks for deleted messages.
Operating Manual 135
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To set the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During message playback
8 5
Enter 85 .
To start playback at the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During or after message playback
8 6
Enter 86 .
Recovering Deleted Messages
You can delete voice/fax messages in your mailbox. Once a message has been deleted, it is retained until the end of the day, then it will be permanently deleted. Deleted messages can be "recovered", after which they will be treated as old messages.
To recover a Deleted Message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During or after voice message/fax message envelope playback
3
Enter 3 .
Replying to Messages
You can reply to messages left in your mailbox by either calling back the caller or by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox.
Calling back is possible when the person who left you the message is another subscriber. Calling back outside callers is possible if their Caller ID information is received by the system, however, this feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
Replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox is possible only if the caller is another subscriber (i.e., the person must have his or her own mailbox). When replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox, you can set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
136 Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
You will receive notification (receipt message) once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your reply immediately or set a message delivery time. However, please note that you cannot reply to receipt messages.
• Only new and old messages can be replied to. To reply to a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to " Recovering Deleted Messages").
To call back the message sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During or after voice message/fax message envelope playback
4 1
Enter 4 . Enter 1 to call the sender.
Operating Manual 137
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To leave a message for the sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During or after voice message/fax message envelope playback
4
Enter 4 .
2
Enter 2 to begin recording.
C.Tone
Record your message.
You can pause and resume recording by pressing 2 . If you pause for more than 20 seconds, recording will stop automatically.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
1
2
1
2
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook.
Enter 11 , 12 or 2 .
To set the delivery time of the message desired delivery time
#
* 1
Enter the desired delivery time and # .
1
2
AM
OR
PM
* 2
Enter 1 for AM ,
2 for PM . desired day of the month for delivery
Enter the day of the month for delivery and # .
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
#
* 3
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
2
Make the message urgent
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
Request a receipt
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 . On-hook.
1
2
Make the message private
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5# . To enter 5:15, press 515# .
• *2 This option may not be available if the Unified Messaging system is programmed to use
24-hour time.
• *3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17# , the message will be delivered tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5# , the message will be delivered on March
5.
• Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent messages are treated like regular messages: messages are played starting with the oldest.
Transferring Messages
You can transfer (forward) messages in your mailbox to other subscribers. However, please note that you cannot transfer receipt messages, or messages that were specified by the sender as "private".
When transferring a message, you can:
138 Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
• Specify the recipient by entering another subscriber’s mailbox number.
•
Group Distribution Lists") or a Mailbox Group number.
• Record your own comments and send them along with the transferred message.
• No acknowledgement will be given to indicate the message has been transferred.
• Only new and old messages can be transferred. To transfer a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to " Recovering Deleted Messages").
To specify the recipients by number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During or after voice message/fax message envelope playback
5
Enter 5 . mailbox no.
OR personal group distribution list no.
OR mailbox group no.
#
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
2
Enter the mailbox number , a personal group distribution list number and # , or a mailbox group number .
To record your comments
1 2
Transfer the message without recording comments
OR
Record comments
Enter 1 or 2 .
C.Tone
Record your comments.
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
To specify the recipients by name (dialling by name)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
During or after voice message/fax message envelope playback
5
Enter 5 .
# 1
Enter #1 . desired recipient's name
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the desired recipient's name .
1
2
3
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3 .
1
2
Transfer the message without recording comments
OR
Record comments
Enter 1 or 2 .
To record your comments
C.Tone
Record your comments.
1 2
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
Operating Manual 139
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Remote Access
You can call the Unified Messaging system while outside and log in to your mailbox in order to listen to your messages. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox remotely:
• Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox remotely from a preprogrammed outside telephone number (assigned as a Caller ID number), you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number. The
Unified Messaging system can recognise the telephone number you are calling from and therefore
determine you are the caller (refer to " Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic
Log-in and Toll Saver"). This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
• Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary if logging in to your mailbox, when your mailbox is not programmed for
Automatic Log-in, or when you are calling from a telephone number not programmed for Automatic Login.
• Ask your System Administrator what telephone number you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system remotely.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system from the preprogrammed outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
your password #
Enter your password and #.
1
Enter 1 to play back messages.
This step can be omitted if your mailbox requires no password.
#
#
8
8 0
Call an extension
OR
Call the operator
Follow the prompts, o r enter #8 or #80 .
# 9
Enter #9 when finished.
On-hook.
• The number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your call can indicate whether or not you have new messages (Toll Saver feature). For more information, consult your System Administrator.
140 Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
Remote manual log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified
Messaging system from an outside telephone.
# 6
Enter #6 . your mailbox no.
Enter and your mailbox number .
your password #
Enter your password and #.
This step can be omitted if your mailbox requires no password.
1
Enter 1 to play back new messages.
# 8 Call an extension
OR
# 8 0 Call the operator
Follow the prompts, o r enter #8 or #80 .
# 9
Enter #9 when finished.
On-hook.
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not allowed access to your extension.
1.8.4 Sending Messages
–
–
Personal Group Distribution Lists
–
–
External Message Delivery Lists
–
Receiving External Delivery Messages
You can record messages and send them to other subscribers, to extension users who do not have mailboxes, and even to outside parties. Messages can be sent using one of the following features:
• Message Delivery:
Sending a message to other subscribers (refer to " Message Delivery").
• External Message Delivery:
Sending a message to parties that do not have Unified Messaging system mailboxes (extension users
and outside parties) (refer to " External Message Delivery").
There are several ways to determine the recipients of your messages. You can specify recipients by:
• Mailbox number or subscriber name (specifies an individual recipient for Message Delivery).
Operating Manual 141
1.8.4 Sending Messages
• Personal Group Distribution List number or Mailbox Group number (specifies a group of recipients for
Message Delivery).
• Extension number or telephone number (specifies an individual recipient for External Message Delivery).
• External Message Delivery List number (specifies a group of recipients for External Message Delivery).
Message Delivery
You can send messages to other subscribers. You can specify message recipients either by number or by subscriber name.
To specify the recipients by number:
• Enter the subscriber’s mailbox number.
•
Enter a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to " Personal Group Distribution Lists").
• Enter a Mailbox Group number (these must be created by the System Administrator. For more information, consult your System Administrator).
To specify the recipients by name:
• Enter the first few letters of the subscriber’s name (Dialling by Name feature).
Once you have specified the recipients, you can record a message. Before sending your message, you can set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your message immediately or set a message delivery time.
142 Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To send a message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
2
Enter 2 .
Go to " To specify recipients by number " or " To specify recipients by name
(dialling by name) ".
To specify recipients by number mailbox no.
OR personal group distribution list no.
OR mailbox group no.
#
Enter the mailbox number , a personal group distribution list number and # , or a mailbox group number .
2
Enter 2 to accept.
Go to
" To record your message ".
To specify recipients by name (dialling by name)
# 1 desired recipient's name
1
2
3
Enter #1 . Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the desired recipient's name .
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3 .
Go to
" To record your message ".
Continued on next page
Operating Manual 143
1.8.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
To record your message
1
Enter 1 to record your message.
Continued from previous page
C.Tone
Record your message.
Press 2 to add another recipient, then go to " To specify recipients by number " or " To specify recipients by name (dialling by name) ". A maximum of 100 recipients can be specified.
Or, press 3 to review the recipients.
You can pause and resume recording by pressing 2 .
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will stop automatically.
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
1
2
1
2
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook
Enter 11 , 12 or 2 .
To set the delivery time of the message
* 2 desired delivery time
#
* 1
1
2
OR
AM
PM
Enter the desired delivery time and # .
Enter 1 for AM ,
2 for PM . desired day of the month for delivery
Enter the day of the month for delivery and # .
#
* 3
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
2
Make the message urgent
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
Make the message private
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
Request a receipt
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 . On-hook.
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5# . To enter 5:15, press 515# .
• *2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
• *3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17# , the message will be delivered tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5# , the message will be delivered on March
5.
• Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent messages are played with other messages, in the original order.
Personal Group Distribution Lists
used by you. You can assign 40 group members (subscribers) to each list and record a name for each group
(for example, "Sales Team", "Department Heads", etc.).
144 Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To create and edit personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 4
Enter 44 . desired personal group distribution list no.
Enter the desired personal group distribution list number (1–4) .
1
C.Tone
Enter 1 to record a name for the group.
State the group name.
mailbox no. of the subscriber
Enter the mailbox number of the subscriber you wish to add to the list.
1 2
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
2
Enter 2 to add the subscriber to the list.
To continue
1
2
Add more subscribers to the list
OR
End
Enter 1 or 2 .
2
Enter 2 to add group members.
On-hook.
To delete members from personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 4
Enter 44 . desired personal group distribution list no.
Enter the desired personal group distribution list number (1–4) .
1
2
Delete all members, then go on-hook to finish
OR
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
Delete the announced member
OR
Keep the member and announce the next member
Enter 1 or 2 .
Repeat this step to delete other members.
3
Enter 3 to delete a group member.
On-hook.
Operating Manual 145
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To change personal group distribution list names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 4
Enter 44 . desired personal group distribution list no.
Enter the desired personal group distribution list number (1–4) .
1
3
Change (record) the list name
OR
Delete the list name, then go on-hook to finish
Enter 1 or 3 .
C.Tone
State the list name.
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
1
Enter 1 to change the list name.
On-hook.
• The System Administrator can create "Mailbox Groups", which are similar to personal group distribution lists except they can be used by other subscribers. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
External Message Delivery
You can send messages to outside parties and to extension users who do not have their own mailboxes.
After you record your message, the system will dial the appropriate telephone numbers and/or extension numbers, and once the party on the other end answers the call, your recorded message will be played back.
You can specify message recipients by:
• Extension number
• Outside telephone number
•
External Message Delivery List number (refer to " External Message Delivery Lists")
Unlike recipients who have their own mailboxes, you have no way of knowing who may answer the call when the Unified Messaging system sends an External Delivery Message. To protect the privacy of your messages, you may assign a password that must be entered by the other party before your message is played back.
You can set Auto Receipt so that you will receive notification once the recipient has played back your message. You can also send your message immediately or set a message delivery time. Finally, recipients of an External Delivery Message can reply to your message, and can even set urgent and private message status.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System
Manager.
146 Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To send an external delivery message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
9 3
Enter 931 .
1
Go to " To specify a single recipient " or " To specify multiple recipients
(external message delivery list )".
To specify a single recipient
1
Enter 1 . outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls.
*
Outside party’s telephone no.
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To specify a extension instead of an outside telephone number, enter the extension number, then skip the next step.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
4-digit password
C.Tone
Enter a 4-digit password required for listening to the message.
State the recipient’s name.
Press # if you do not want to set a password.
1 #
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter # for immediate delivery.
To set message delivery time, go to " To set message delivery time ".
Go to
" To record your message ".
Continued on next page
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits, press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
Operating Manual 147
1.8.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS Continued from previous page
To specify multiple recipients (external message delivery list) desired list no.
4-digit password 2
Enter 2 . Enter the desired list number ( 1 or 2 ).
Enter a 4-digit password required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want to set a password.
#
Enter # for immediate delivery.
Go to
" To record your message ".
To set message delivery time, go to " To set message delivery time ".
To set message delivery time desired delivery time #
* 1
Enter the desired delivery time and # .
1
2
OR
AM
PM
* 2
Enter 1 for AM , 2 for PM . desired day of the month for delivery
Enter the day of the month for delivery and # .
#
* 3
To record your message
1
2
Request a receipt
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
Go to
" To record your message ".
2
Enter 2 to accept.
C.Tone
Record your message.
You can pause and resume recording by pressing 2 .
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will stop automatically.
On-hook.
148 Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5# . To enter 5:15, press 515# .
• *2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
• *3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17# , the message will be delivered tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5# , the message will be delivered on March
5.
• If you set a password required for listening to the message, make sure you notify each recipient what the password is.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
External Message Delivery Lists
Your external message delivery lists allow you to send messages to several outside parties and extension
users who do not have their own mailboxes at once (refer to " External Message Delivery"). You can
create and edit 2 External Message Delivery Lists, and these lists can only be used by you. You can assign up to 8 members to each list and record a name for each member.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
Operating Manual 149
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To create/add to an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
9 3 2
Enter 932 .
1
2
List number 1
OR
List number 2
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
Enter 1 . outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls.
outside telephone no.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To store an extension number, simply enter the extension number then skip the next step.
C.Tone
State the member’s name.
To continue
1
2
Add more members
OR
End
Enter 1 or 2 . On-hook.
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to add the member.
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits, press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
To delete members from an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
9 3 2
Enter 932 .
1
2
List number 1
OR
List number 2
Enter 1 or 2 .
2
Enter 2 .
1
2
Delete all members, then go on-hook
OR
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
Delete the announced member
OR
Keep the member and announce the next member
Enter 1 or 2 .
Repeat this step to delete other members.
On-hook.
150 Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Receiving External Delivery Messages
When you send an external delivery message, the Unified Messaging system will call each of the specified recipients. When a recipient answers the call, the system will guide him or her through the following procedure. After a recipient has listened to an external delivery message, he or she can send you a reply to your message, and even set urgent or private message status.
To receive a message and reply
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
When a recipient answers the call
1
Enter 1 to receive the message.
4-digit password #
Enter a 4-digit password and # required for listening to the message.
The message is played back.
If you did not set a password, this step will be skipped.
2
Enter 2 to reply.
C.Tone
To end the call, press , then go on-hook to finish.
Record a reply.
1
2
Make the message urgent
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
1
2
Make the message private
OR
Continue
Enter 1 or 2 .
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
• If the recipient enters an incorrect password 3 times, the system will announce the following information if it has been programmed. This information can help the recipient track down the message or message sender (you).
– Company name
– Callback telephone number
– Your subscriber name
• The Unified Messaging system may be able to guide recipients using a different language.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
–
–
–
–
–
Assigning Your Covering Extension
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line
Operating Manual 151
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
–
Call Transfer
When a call reaches your extension via the Automated Attendant service, normally your extension will ring and you can answer the call. If you use the Call Transfer feature, however, the Unified Messaging system can handle the call in a number of ways. The status you set for Call Transfer determines what happens to the call. You can set one of the following:
Call Blocking:
which allows you to have your calls ring at another extension, transferred to your mailbox, transferred to the operator, etc. The call will not ring at your extension. The call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Call Screening:
The system will prompt the caller to record his or her name. If you are available to answer calls, the system will ring your extension and play back the name of the caller. You can then answer the call if you choose. If you do not or cannot answer the call, the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Intercom Paging:
The Unified Messaging system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. The call will not ring at your extension. Your name will be announced to alert you to the call. If you do not or cannot answer the call, the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you. The call will not ring at your extension.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the custom service you specify here. The call will not ring at your extension.
Disable Call Transfer:
Turns the Call Transfer feature off. The call will ring at your extension.
152 Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To set call transfer status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
5 1
Enter 51 .
4
5
6
1
2
3
Call Blocking
Call Screening
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Mailbox
Transfer to Custom Service
Disable Call Transfer
Enter the desired Call Transfer status .
Follow the prompts as necessary.
The prompts heard will vary depending on the feature you set in the previous step.
On-hook.
• If Call Screening or Disable is selected, calls will be transferred to an outside telephone if a
telephone number has been programmed for call transfer to outside line (refer to "
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line").
Incomplete Call Handling
When a call is directed to your extension via the Automated Attendant service, Incomplete Call Handling will handle the calls if:
• You do not answer the call (These calls are considered "no answer" calls).
• You are on another call (These calls are considered "busy" calls).
•
You have set Call Blocking (refer to " Call Transfer").
The status you set for Incomplete Call Handling determines what happens to these calls. You can set one or more of the following for no answer calls and for busy calls separately. If you select more than one option, the caller will be prompted to select his or her desired option.
Leaving a Message:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you.
Transfer to Covering Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to your Covering Extension (refer to " Assigning Your Covering
Extension"). If you have not assigned your Covering Extension, this option is not available.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to the call.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator.
Operating Manual 153
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Return to Top Menu:
The caller is returned to the top menu of the Automated Attendant service and can then choose to call a different extension.
To set Incomplete Call Handling status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
Follow the prompts as necessary.
5
Enter 5 .
The prompts heard will vary depending on the feature you set in the previous step.
4
5
No answer calls
OR
Busy calls
Enter 4 or 5 .
1
2
Change
OR
Accept
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
3
4
5
6
Leaving a Message
Transfer to Covering Extension
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Custom Service
Transfer to Operator
Return to Top Menu
Enter the desired Incomplete Call
Handling status .
To continue
Select an additional status.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
• When Call Blocking is enabled, blocked calls are treated by Incomplete Call Handling for no answer calls.
Assigning Your Covering Extension
A Covering Extension is an extension that receives your calls instead of you. Your calls can be transferred to your Covering Extension in 2 ways:
• By the Incomplete Call Handling Feature:
When the Incomplete Call Handling feature handles the call (i.e., if you do not answer, if you are on another call, or if you have set Call Blocking), it will be transferred to your Covering Extension if you have
set Incomplete Call Handling to "Transfer to Covering Extension" (refer to "
• By pressing the specified dialling key (0, 3–9):
If the caller presses the key assigned for "Transfer to the Specified Extension" during your greeting message or while recording a message for you, the call will be transferred to your Covering Extension.
• You can change the dialling key that transfers your callers to your Covering Extension. If you assign the "Transfer to Operator" option in your Personal Custom Service to a dialling key, callers who press that dialling key will be transferred to your Covering Extension (refer
to " Personal Custom Service").
• If you do not assign your Covering Extension, callers will be transferred to the operator instead.
154 Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign your Covering Extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
5 2
Enter 52 . desired extension no.
Enter the desired extension number .
If you have already assigned your Covering Extension and want to assign a different extension, press 1 before entering the desired extension number.
2
Enter 2 to accept. On-hook.
• Once you assign a Covering Extension, remember to tell callers in your greeting message that they can press the button you have assigned for transferring to your Covering
Extension. For example, "To speak with my assistant, press 0".
Remote Call Forwarding
You can programme the Unified Messaging system to forward your calls to another extension or to an outside telephone (if authorised). You can do this even when you are away from the office. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are already on another call.
FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you do not answer your telephone.
FWD Busy and No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are on another call or do not answer your telephone.
FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to the specified outside telephone number if you are authorised to use this feature.
FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
Operating Manual 155
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 8
Enter 48 .
1
2
Change telephone number 1
OR
Change telephone number 2
Enter 1 or 2 .
If you have already set a telephone number and wish to change it, press 1 after selecting telephone number 1 or 2 .
outside line access no.
outside party’s telephone no.
Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside party’s telephone needed for making outside calls.
number (max. 32 digits including outside line access number).
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
• Before you can forward your calls to an outside telephone, you should first store the telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature. You can store 2 telephone numbers for use with Remote Call Forwarding.
• If you change one of the outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding, you will need to set Remote Call Forwarding to "FWD to Outside" once again before the new outside telephone number will be used as the forward destination. If you do not do this, the old telephone number will continue to be used.
156 Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To set/cancel Remote Call Forwarding
From Outside Telephone
Log in to your mailbox.
9 4
Enter 94 .
5
6
1
2
3
4
FWD All
FWD Busy
FWD No Answer
FWD Busy or No Answer extension no. of the transfer destination
Enter the extension number of the transfer destination , then go to STEP B .
OR
FWD to Outside, then go to STEP A .
*
Cancel call forwarding, then go to STEP B .
Enter required number .
STEP A
1 Set telephone number 1
2 Set telephone number 2
OR
3
Set another telephone number
Enter required number .
outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls.
outside party’s telephone no.
Dial the outside party’s telephone number (max. 32 digits including outside line access number).
STEP B
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
• * This option is announced only if you are authorised to use it through system programming for PBX COS (Class of Service) settings and UM COS settings. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside
Line
When you assign a telephone number for Call Transfer to Outside Line, your calls will be transferred to the assigned telephone number when:
•
You have set Call Screening (refer to " Call Transfer").
•
You have set Disable Call Transfer (refer to " Call Transfer").
Operating Manual 157
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
5 6 outside line access no.
Enter 56 .
Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls.
If you have already stored a telephone number and wish to change it, press 1 before continuing.
outside party's telephone no.
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(max. 32 digits including outside line access number).
2
Enter 2 to accept. On-hook.
To cancel telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
5 6 3
Enter 563 . On-hook.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
Voice Mail Transfer
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages. Using the Voice Mail Transfer button, you can also perform operations with one touch (for PT and PS only).
158 Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7
Enter 71 .
1
0
OR
1
OR
2
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
0
2
3
4
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number .
For "Cancel", go on-hook directly after entering 0.
UM group’s floating extension no.
Enter UM group’s floating extension number .
#
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer .
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
(DSS)
OR desired extension no.
Press Voice Mail
Transfer .
Press DSS or dial desired extension number .
Operating Manual 159
1.8.6 Other Features
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
Off-hook.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number or press DSS .
• *Indication tone after going off-hook
1 s
R.B.Tone
B.Tone
OR
DND Tone
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer .
• If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
1.8.6 Other Features
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Personal Caller Name Announcement
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
Setting Absent Message Remotely
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
160 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
Interview Mailbox
An interview mailbox is a mailbox designed to ask questions to callers and record their answers. If you have an interview mailbox (not all subscribers do), you can record up to 10 questions and set the answer recording time individually for each question from 1 to 60 seconds.
Your interview mailbox can be used, for example, to allow callers to place orders or request information from your company. You can ask them to record their names, address, and order or request information, and then you can note their information later while playing back their messages.
• If you would like to use this feature, you must first be assigned an Interview Mailbox. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
To record questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
9 2 1
Enter 921 .
1
2
3
4
Change (record or re-record) this question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and # , then repeat this step.
Enter the desired option .
C.Tone
Record the question.
1 2
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
To continue
Change another question.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
To change answer lengths
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
9 2 2
Enter 922 .
1
2
3
4
Change the answer length.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and # , then repeat this step.
Enter the desired option .
answer length
Enter the answer length
(1–60) in seconds.
To continue
Change the answer length of another question.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
Operating Manual 161
1.8.6 Other Features
To delete questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
9 2 3
Enter 923 .
1
2
3
4
Delete the current question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and # , then repeat this step.
Enter the desired option .
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
Message Reception Mode
If you have an interview mailbox in addition to your regular mailbox, Message Reception Mode determines which mailbox is used when:
• Calls are directed to your mailbox by the "Leaving a Message" setting of the Incomplete Call Handling
feature (refer to " Incomplete Call Handling").
• Your extension is a Logical Extension (i.e., your mailbox receives your calls automatically, perhaps because you do not have your own telephone for regular use).
To set a message mode
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
5 3
Enter 53 .
1
Enter 1 to toggle between
Interview Mode (interview mailbox) and
Message Recording Mode (regular mailbox).
On-hook.
• Not all subscribers have interview mailboxes. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
Message Waiting Notification
The Message Waiting Notification feature lets you know you have received new messages in your mailbox by:
Message Waiting Lamp:
The message lamp on your telephone (if it has one) will light when you receive a new message. If you have a 6-line display PT, you can also see the number of new messages you have on your display. If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
Device Notification:
Notifying you via a "device", i.e., an outside telephone, another PBX extension, your cellular phone, etc. You can assign three different devices. For each device, you have the option of receiving notification for urgent messages only, or for all messages. You can also choose to receive notification during certain hours only
162 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
(called "scheduling"), which is useful if you do not want to be disturbed at night, for example. For more information on scheduling, consult your System Administrator.
If you turn device notification on for more than one device, the lowest numbered device (1, 2, or 3) will be used first. If notification is not possible (for example, if your outside telephone is busy), the next device will be used.
Message notification by e-mail may also be available for your mailbox. When you receive new messages in your mailbox, you can receive notification by e-mail. The recorded message can also be added to the e-mail as an attachment. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
• Displaying the number of new messages is only available with a 6-line Display PT. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
To turn Message Waiting Lamp Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
6 1
Enter 61 .
1
Enter 1 to enable/disable lamp notification.
On-hook.
To turn Device Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
1
2
Send notification for all messages
OR
Send notification for urgent messages only
Enter 1 or 2 .
6 2
Enter 62 . desired device no.
Enter the desired device number (1–6).
1
2
3
Use a preprogrammed schedule
Receive notification always (continuously)
Turn off notifications
Enter 1 , 2 or 3 .
On-hook.
• Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3" for "E-mail/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
• To use the Device Notification feature for device number 1, 2, or 3, the telephone number for each device should first be assigned.
Operating Manual 163
1.8.6 Other Features
To change device numbers
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
6 3
Enter 63 . outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls.
To store an extension number, simply enter the extension number then skip the next step.
desired device no.
Enter the desired device number (1–3).
1
Enter 1 to change the assigned number.
To delete the assigned number, press 3 then go on-hook to finish.
* outside telephone no.
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
2
Enter 2 to accept. On-hook.
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits, press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
Personal Caller Name Announcement
By storing caller telephone numbers and recording caller names, you can have the Unified Messaging system announce the caller name to you when:
• You play back a message from one of the assigned callers.
• The system transfers a call to you from one of the assigned callers.
• The system pages you to inform you that you have a call from one of the assigned callers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
164 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 5 1
Enter 451 . caller ID no.
#
STEP A
2
C.Tone
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number, 20 digits max.) and # .
To continue
Enter 2 to accept.
STEP B
1
Enter 1 to end recording.
2
Enter 2 to add.
State the caller’s name.
1
2
Add another caller ID number.
OR
End
Enter 1 or 2 . On-hook.
To change Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 5
Enter 452 .
2
1
2
3
Change the Caller ID number, then go to STEP A in " To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names ".
OR
Change the caller’s name, then go to STEP B in " To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names ".
OR
Accept the current item as is and skip to the next item, then repeat this step.
On-hook.
Operating Manual 165
1.8.6 Other Features
To delete Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 5 3
Enter 453 .
1
2
Delete all numbers, then go on-hook to finish.
OR
Delete one number.
Enter 1 or 2 .
1
2
Delete the announced number.
OR
Keep the number and announce the next number, then repeat this step.
Enter 1 or 2 .
When finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
On-hook.
• The number of callers you can assign for this feature is controlled by the System
Administrator.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PT/PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when an extension PIN is stored.
166 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening .
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
PT PT/PS
Hands-free Mode Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring
No operation
Monitoring (Hands-free) Monitoring (Handset)
MONITOR
OR OR
(Live Call
Screening)
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening .
Off-hook.
Stop monitoring
Answering
OR
MONITOR
Press
SP-PHONE or MONITOR .
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening .
OR
Stop monitoring
Off-hook.
Answering the call
OR
MONITOR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR .
Off-hook.
Stop monitoring
On-hook.
Answering the call
(Live Call
Screening)
Press
Live Call
Screening .
• The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
• The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
• This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
• Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Operating Manual 167
1.8.6 Other Features
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Live Call Screening Mode Set
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
•
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
Recording Your Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Two-way
Record)
Press Two-way Record .
To stop recording, press this button again.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Two-way
Transfer)
(DSS)
OR another extension no.
Press Two-way
Transfer .
To stop recording, press this button again.
Press DSS or enter another extension number .
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch Two-way Transfer .
168 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
• The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
Note
When you record your Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
• If all Unified Messaging system ports are busy when you try to use one of these features, you will hear a warning tone, dial tone, or busy tone, depending on the feature you are trying to use.
• Recording time when using these features may be limited. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch Twoway Transfer button.
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll
Saver
When logging in to your mailbox remotely (i.e., from an outside telephone) to listen to your messages, the
Remote Automatic Log-in (refer to " Remote Access") and Toll Saver features identify you by
recognising your telephone number (caller ID). In order to use these features, you must first store the telephone numbers that you will use to access your mailbox remotely.
Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
To assign
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 9
Enter 49 .
1
2
Change telephone number 1
OR
Change telephone number 2
Enter 1 or 2 .
If you have already set a telephone number and wish to change it, press 1 after selecting telephone number 1 or 2 .
outside telephone no.
#
Enter your outside telephone number
(max. 20 digits including area code if needed) and # .
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
• The System Administrator must enable Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver for your mailbox before it can be used.
Operating Manual 169
1.8.6 Other Features
Personal Custom Service
A Personal Custom Service is a set of options you can present to your callers, allowing them to press buttons on their telephones in order to access certain features. You should explain the options available to your callers in each of your personal greeting messages, for example, "This is (name). I can’t take your call right now. Press 3 to leave me a message. Press 4 to speak with my assistant. Press 5 to dial another
extension…". For details on recording your greeting messages, refer to " Changing or Deleting Your
Personal Greeting Messages" or "
Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
You can create your own personal custom service and allow your callers to access the following features:
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox (or another mailbox you specify here) where he or she can leave a message.
Transfer to Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to the extension you specify when creating the custom service.
Transfer to Outside:
The system will transfer the caller to the outside telephone number you specify when creating the custom service. This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System Manager.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Voice Mail Service:
The system will prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number and leave a message.
Automated Attendant Service:
The system will prompt the caller to dial an extension number in order to speak with someone else.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to the call.
Repeat Greeting:
The caller can play your greeting message back from the beginning in order to listen to your Personal
Custom Service options once again.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator, or to your Covering Extension if you have assigned one
(refer to " Assigning Your Covering Extension").
You can also select what happens when a caller makes no selection (No DTMF Input Operation) while listening to your greeting, perhaps because the caller is using a rotary/pulse telephone. The caller can either be transferred to your mailbox or be disconnected.
• The following dialling keys are assigned to the following features by default, and cannot be changed.
1
2
End recording
Begin recording while listening to personal greeting message
170 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
Exit
To create your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4 6 1 desired dialling key 1
Enter 461 .
Transfer to a mailbox, then enter the desired mailbox number.
Transfer to an extension, then enter the desired extension number.
Transfer to an outside telephone
(may not be available).
• Next enter the outside line access number
and the desired outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
Transfer to a Custom Service, then enter the desired Custom Service number.
Activate Voice Mail Service.
Activate Automated Attendant Service
(Call Transfer Service).
Activate paging.
Repeat the greeting.
Transfer to the operator.
Enter the desired dialling key (0, 3–9) that you want to assign an option to.
Enter 1 .
Skip this step if you are creating your
Personal Custom Service for the first time.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option .
To delete options from your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 6 1
Enter 461 . desired dialling key
Enter the desired dialling key (0, 3–9) that you want to delete an option from.
3
Enter 3 .
On-hook.
Operating Manual 171
1.8.6 Other Features
To select the No DTMF Input operation
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Log in to your mailbox.
4 6 1
Enter 461 .
1
Enter 1 to select the No DTMF Input Operation.
1
Enter 1 .
1
2
3
Message recording.
Disconnect the caller.
Disconnect the caller when call was received after hours
(message recording for all other times).
Enter the desired option .
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To confirm the settings for your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
On-hook.
Log in to your mailbox.
4 6
Enter 46 .
2
Enter 2 to review.
On-hook.
• The System Administrator or the System Manager must enable Transfer to Outside for your mailbox before it can be used.
• The Transfer to Outside option can be used a maximum of 4 times in your Personal Custom
Service.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a wake-up call.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until cancelled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook to answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
172 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9 5
Enter 95 .
1
2
3
Change the setting
Accept the current setting, then go on-hook to finish.
Cancel (turn off) the Timed Reminder, then go on-hook to finish.
Enter the desired option .
desired time # * 1
Enter the desired time and # .
1
2
OR
AM
PM
* 2
Enter 1 for AM ,
2 for PM .
1
2
Once
OR
Daily
Enter 1 for once or 2 for daily.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5# . To enter 5:15, press 515# .
• *2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
Setting Absent Message Remotely
You can set your absent message by accessing the subscriber service menu. To login to your mailbox from
an outside telephone, refer to " Remote Access".
To set/cancel
From Outside Telephone
Log in to your mailbox.
7
Enter 7 .
1
2
3
Change the setting
Accept the current setting, then go on-hook to finish.
Cancel your absent message, then go on-hook to finish.
Enter the desired option .
absent message no.
Enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
On-hook.
Operating Manual 173
1.8.6 Other Features
Call-through Service
You can make outside calls by accessing the subscriber service menu (from an outside telephone) and
To call an outside party
From Outside Telephone
Log in to your mailbox.
8
Enter 8 . outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls.
outside telephone no.
#
Dial the outside telephone number and # .
Talk.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
Sending a Fax from your PC
You can send a document from your PC as a fax by selecting KX-NS1000 FAX Driver as the printer.
To download KX-NS1000 FAX Driver
1.
Log in to Web Maintenance Console.
2.
On the Edit User screen, click the Unified Message tab.
3.
Click Download for Fax Driver Tool to access the download site for the KX-NS1000 FAX Driver.
• For details about the KX-NS1000 FAX Driver software, refer to the software’s documentation.
•
For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to "3.2 System Programming Using Web
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
If the Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook is installed to your PC, you can access the contents of your mailbox from your PC through Microsoft Outlook. Voice and fax messages appear in subscribers’ inboxes as e-mail messages.
With the Outlook plug-in, you can do the following:
• Play back voice messages on a PC or through a telephone
• View received fax messages on the PC
• Record and send voice messages from a PC or telephone
• Forward and reply to messages to another subscriber
174 Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
• Call back the sender of a message quickly when the message has caller information included
• Export voice and fax message data
• Attach voice messages and fax data to other e-mail messages
• For details about using the Outlook Plug-in, refer to the documentation of Communication
Assistant.
IMAP
If your e-mail client supports IMAP4, you can access the contents of your mailbox through an e-mail client and you can do the following:
• Play back voice messages
• View received fax messages
• Save voice and fax message data to your PC
• Delete voice and fax messages
• For configuring an IMAP account, consult your System Administrator.
UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook
If you will be accessing Unified Messaging data through an IMAP connection, you must install the IMAP
Session Controller software. This software is a plug-in for Microsoft Windows. When installed, it appears in the notification area. The software changes the selected account in the Outlook user interface from the
Unified Messaging IMAP account to the default Outlook inbox after a specified time period. Doing so enables multiple users efficiently interact with the KX-NS1000 through Microsoft Outlook.
To download IMAP Session Controller
You can download the IMAP Session Controller software from Web Maintenance Console:
1.
Log in to Web Maintenance Console.
2.
On the Edit User screen, click the Unified Message tab.
3.
Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session
Controller software.
•
For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to "3.2 System Programming Using Web
To install IMAP Session Controller
Double-click UmicSetup.exe
, and then follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
To uninstall IMAP Session Controller
Uninstall this software using the programme uninstall feature in the Control Panel. For details, refer to the documentation for your operating system.
To configure settings and view information
While this software is running, you can configure settings and view information about the software. Rightclick the icon in the notification area, and then select an item.
Operating Manual 175
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Notification area icon
Item
Settings
About
Exit
Description
Language
Select the language to use for the settings dialogue box and the notification area menu.
No Operation Timer
Enter the time period after which the selected account is changed from the Unified
Messaging account to the default Outlook inbox if there has been no user activity.
Timer value: 30 to 600 seconds
(Recommended timer value: 30 to 60 seconds)
E-Mail Account for UM
Enter your Unified Messaging e-mail account. The maximum size is 256 characters.
If nothing is entered, all of the e-mail accounts using IMAP are assumed to be Unified
Messaging accounts.
You can copy the mail account from Mail Account in the General tab of the Internet
E-mail Settings dialogue box.
• To open the Internet E-mail Settings dialogue box:
– In Outlook 2007, click the Tools menu → Account Settings → Change → More
Settings button.
– In Outlook 2010, click the File menu → Info → Account Settings → Change →
More Settings button.
Display the copyright and version of this software.
Exit this software.
1.8.7 Quick Reference
The flow below includes all top menu options and frequently used features. Only options 1–4 and 0 are announced in the top menu when accessed. If you press 0 (help menu), you can listen to the whole top menu (options 1–9).
The help menu may not be available from the top menu depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
176 Operating Manual
1.8.7 Quick Reference
To Enter a Mailbox
From a Remote
Location, Dial:
#6 + mailbox number
1
2
3
Password #
Listen to New Messages:
1 Voice Message
2 Fax Message Envelope
# All Messages
Send a Message:
Enter Mailbox Number
1 Record Message
2 Add Another Mailbox
3 Review Mailing List
Listen to Old Messages:
1 Voice Message
2 Fax Message Envelope
# All Messages
Main Menu:
You have new messages.
1 Listen to New Messages
2 Send a Message
3 Listen to Old Messages
4 Mailbox Management
5 Set Automated Attendant (AA) status
6 Message Notification
7 Change Absent Message
8 Call-through Service
9 Other Features
Hang Up
1
2
#
Receive New Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only) or Print fax (After playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
# Save This Message as New
0 Help
1
2
#
Receive Old Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only) or Print fax (After playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
Continued on next page
Operating Manual 177
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
4 Mailbox Management:
1 Record Personal Greetings
2 Set Password
3 Enter Owner's Name
4 Set Group Distribution List
5 Record Caller Name/Number
6 Set Personal Custom Service
7 Set Fax Option
8 Set Remote Call FWD to Outside
9 Set Numbers for Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
5
Set AA Status:
1 Set Call Transfer Status
2 Set Covering Extensions
3 Set Message Reception Mode
4 Set Incomplete Call Handling For No Answer
5 Set Incomplete Call Handing For Busy
6 Set Telephone Number for Transfer
1
Record Personal Greeting:
1 No Answer
2 Busy Signal
3 After Hours
4 Caller ID
5 Temporary
6 Absent Message
1 Set Call Transfer Status:
1 Call Blocking
2 Call Screening
3 Intercom Paging
4 Transfer to Mailbox
5 Transferring to Specified Custom Service
6 All Disable
4 Incomplete Handling Status:
For No Answer
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
5
Incomplete Handling Status:
For Busy
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
6 Message Notification:
1 Message Waiting Lamp
2 Device Status
3 Assign Telephone Numbers
7 Change Absent Message
8 Call-through Service
Continued on next page
178 Operating Manual
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
9
Set Other Features:
1 Listen to Deleted Message
2 Set Interview Mailbox
3 Set External Delivery Message
4 Set Remote Call Forwarding
5 Set Timed Reminder
1 Listen to Deleted Messages:
1 Voice Message
2 Fax Message Envelope
# All Messages
1
2
#
Receive Deleted Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Recover Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
2 Interview Mailbox Management:
1 Record Question
2 Set Answer Length
3 Erase Question
3 External Message Delivery:
1 Record Message
2 Set a Mailing List
4 Remote Call Forwarding Set:
1 FWD—All Calls
2 FWD—Busy
3 FWD—No Answer
4 FWD—Busy/No Answer
5 FWD to an Outside Line
6 FWD Cancel
Operating Manual 179
1.9 Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
1.9 Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a wake-up call.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until cancelled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook to answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
hour/minute
0
OR
1
AM
PM
OR
7 6 0 1 hour/minute
Off-hook.
Enter 760 .
Enter 1 .
Enter hour (01–12) and minute (00–59) and then
0 for AM or 1 for PM.
Or enter hour (00–23) and minute (00–59).
0
OR
1
Once
Daily
Enter 0 for once or 1 for daily.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• * Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX (12-hour or 24-hour).
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
7 6 0
Enter 760 .
Off-hook.
To stop or answer the ringback
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
0
Enter 0 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
OR
Press INTERCOM or off-hook.
180 Operating Manual
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
To confirm
PT
Press TRANSFER several times.
• You can also confirm the Timed Reminder by using the soft button.
• The alarm keeps ringing for preprogrammed seconds.
• If you receive an incoming call during ringback, the ringing starts after the ringback stops.
• If you are having a conversation exceeding alarm ringing period, the ringback will start after your conversation.
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
–
–
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Do Not Disturb (DND)
You can set this feature to prevent incoming calls from ringing at your extension. This can be useful, for example, when you are in a meeting or busy.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7
Enter 71 .
1
0
OR
1
OR
2
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
1
OR
0
Set
Cancel
Enter 1 to set or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Do Not Disturb by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the
FWD/DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
Operating Manual 181
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
• For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
• The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Red on: FWD mode
Flashing red slowly: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
• The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown below:
FWD DND Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
Note
A FWD/DND button (customised button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the mode cannot be changed.
• If your extension has set this feature, a calling extension will hear DND tone.
• If this feature is set, the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature does not work.
• Specified extensions can override this feature and call DND extensions (DND Override).
• When making a call using an SDN button to a PDN extension with DND set, this feature will temporarily be deactivated.
• When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (DND set/cancel), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls and FWD/DND—
Intercom calls, because: a.
the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button
[fixed button]) will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercoms calls, but not both.
Note
The DND icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b.
pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
182 Operating Manual
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can easily switch the FWD/DND status for outside/intercom calls without clearing any FWD destination that was set previously.
• For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To set and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To switch the FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND button again to switch the status.
To switch the FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
2
Enter 2 .
The current FWD/DND status for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND button again to switch the status.
Operating Manual 183
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
1
OR
2
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
*
Enter 1 or 2 .
Press STORE .
0
OR
1
FWD/DND off
DND on
Enter 0 or 1 .
Press STORE to set.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
• * This step can be omitted.
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
FWD/DND Off : FWD/DND off
OR
Do Not Disturb : DND on
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press UP or DOWN with the Navigator Key to select the desired item.
Press ENTER to set.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call
Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
During a conversation, you can be informed of a call waiting with a tone or voice announcement through your built-in speaker or handset. (Default: Disable—No call [Intercom calls]/No tone [Outside calls])
Call Waiting Tone:
a waiting tone through the built-in speaker of PT/handset of SLT. To change the tone from PT, refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
OHCA:
a voice announcement through the built-in speaker
184 Operating Manual
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
Whisper OHCA:
a voice announcement through the handset
To set/cancel for intercom calls (Manual Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 3 1
Enter 731 .
0
OR
1
OR
2
OR
3
No call
Tone
OHCA
Whisper OHCA
Enter 0 to 3 as you desire.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To set/cancel for outside calls (Automatic Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
7 3 2
0
OR
1
No tone
Tone
Off-hook.
Enter 732 .
Enter 0 or 1 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones.
• Whisper OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones and IP proprietary telephones. In addition, both you and the other party must use supported telephones.
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and
Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line Identification
Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
CLIP:
When making an outside call, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the called party.
COLP:
When receiving an outside call, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the calling party.
You can select the telephone number sent, either the number of the line used or the number assigned to your extension.
If you select "Public", the calling/called party sees the number of the line used (subscriber’s number).
If you select "Your extension", they see the telephone number assigned on your extension.
Operating Manual 185
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line Identification
Restriction [COLR])
To show either the number assigned to the outside line or your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
7 2
1
OR
2
Public
Your extension
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter 7 2 . Enter 1 for public or 2 for your extension.
On-hook.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
• When you forward a call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will be that of the calling party or of the forwarding extension depending on system programming.
• If you use the ICD Group button to make a call to the other party, the telephone number assigned to the ICD Group will be used.
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line Identification Restriction
[COLR])
When receiving an outside call, you can select whether the caller can see your telephone number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
7 0
0
OR
1
Show
Prevent
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter 7 0 .
Enter 0 to show or 1 to prevent.
On-hook.
• You can change the mode by pressing a preset COLR button while on-hook (There is no
COLR button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The COLR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : shows your telephone number.
Red on : prevents your telephone number being displayed.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) button.
186 Operating Manual
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR])
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called
Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
When making an outside call, you can select whether the called party can see your telephone number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
7 1
0
OR
1
Show
Prevent
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter 7 1 .
Enter 0 to show or 1 to prevent.
On-hook.
• You can change the mode by pressing a preset CLIR button while on-hook (There is no
CLIR button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The CLIR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : shows your telephone number.
Red on : prevents your telephone number being displayed.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) button.
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation
(Executive Busy Override Deny)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 3 3
Enter 733 .
1
OR
0
Prevent
Allow
Enter 1 to prevent or 0 to allow.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• Some extensions may be prohibited from performing this feature.
Operating Manual 187
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
You can listen to the background music through your telephone speaker while onhook. An external music source, such as a radio, can be connected.
If your extension becomes busy (off-hook, making or receiving a call etc.), the music stops temporarily. When you go back on-hook, the music starts again.
To select and set/cancel
PT
Off-hook.
7 5 1
Enter 751 .
BGM no.
OR
0
Cancel
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to listen to background music.
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Security)
You can protect the line against audible notification tones, such as a call waiting tone during a conversation.
Set this feature if your extension has a data communication device, such as a PC or fax machine connected to ensure secure data transmission.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
7 3 0
Enter 730 .
1
OR
0
Set
Cancel
Enter 1 to set or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.9.10 Checking the Time Service Status
You can check the current status of the Time Service on the display.
188 Operating Manual
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone)
PT
While on-hook
OR
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press TRANSFER or Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break) .
• The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
• Any extension user except the managers can check the current status by pressing the Time
Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone)
In the case where a single line telephone is connected in parallel to your digital proprietary telephone, you can choose whether the parallelled single line telephone will ring to an incoming call or not.
(Default: Ring)
DPT
Off-hook.
3 9
Enter 39 .
1
OR
0
Ring
No ring
Enter 1 to ring or 0 not to ring.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• Even if "No ring" is selected, calls can be made and answered on the single line telephone by lifting the handset.
• If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to you.
Operating Manual 189
1.9.12 Using Your PS or S-PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
1.9.12 Using Your PS or S-PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone
(Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Your PS or S-PS can be used in parallel with a PT, SLT, or SIP phone.
When in this mode, incoming calls to a wired telephone also ring the paired PS or S-PS.
To set
PS/S-PS
Press TALK .
To cancel
4 8
Enter 48 .
1 extension no.
Enter 1 .
Enter extension number of the paired telephone.
C.Tone
Press CANCEL .
4 8
Enter 48 .
0
Enter 0 .
C.Tone
Press CANCEL .
Press TALK .
• Some wired telephones are prohibited from using this feature.
• If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to you (except SIP phones and S-PSs).
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone
(One-numbered extension)
Two telephones connected to the KX-NS1000 can be set to share 1 extension number, and both telephones can be set to ring (One-numbered Extension feature). You can choose whether the sub extension associated with the main extension will ring when an incoming call is received.
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
4 8
Enter 48 .
1
Enter 1 .
Enter extension number of the paired telephone.
C.Tone
On-hook.
190 Operating Manual
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4 8
Enter 48 .
Off-hook.
To pickup call during conversation
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
0
C.Tone
Enter 0 .
On-hook.
4
(DSS)
OR
1 extension no.
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Talk.
Press lit DSS of the paired telephone.
Or enter 41 and then dial extension number of the paired telephone.
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension
Feature Clear)
You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension to the default settings with one operation.
This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension.
– Message Waiting
– Call Forwarding (FWD)
– Timed Reminder
– Do Not Disturb (DND)
– Call Waiting for intercom calls
– Call Waiting for outside calls
– Data Line Security
– Log-in/Log-out
Features
Message Waiting—(All the messages that have been left by other extension users)
Off
Off
Default Setting
Operating Manual 191
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
Features
Call Pickup Deny
Absent Message
Paging Deny
Timed Reminder
Call Waiting for intercom calls *1
Call Waiting for outside calls
Executive Busy Override Deny
BGM
Data Line Security
Parallelled Telephone
Log-in/Log-out
*1 These features may not be reset depending on the system programming.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Default Setting
Allow
Off
Off
Allow
Cleared
Off
Disable (No call)
Disable (No tone)
Allow
Off
Off
The telephone in parallel rings.
Log-in
7 9 0
Enter 790 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
Off-hook.
• For Users in Canada Only:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, the setting of Call Waiting becomes "Enable
(Tone)". In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when you go off-hook.
192 Operating Manual
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Logout, Wrap-up)
You can control your status in an incoming call distribution group. When in the Log-out mode, incoming calls to the group will not ring at your extension. When you return, calls will again ring at your extension. (Default: Log-in)
Even if your extension is logged-in, you can have a specified time period (wrap-up time) when you will not receive calls after completing a previous call. This time can be used for you to write a report and so on.
You can also manually select "Not Ready" mode to temporarily leave a distribution group.
Talk.
Ready
Log-in
Log-out
Wrap-up Not Ready
To set Log-in/Log-out
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
7 3 6
0
OR
1
Log-out
Log-in
Off-hook.
Enter 736 .
Enter 0 or 1 .
ICD Group extension no.
OR
Specified
All
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter ICD Group extension number or .
Operating Manual 193
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)
PT/PS
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out)
ICD Group extension no.
OR
Specified
All
Press Log-in/Log-out .
Enter ICD Group extension number or .
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out for all groups)
OR
(Log-in/Log-out of a specified group)
Press Log-in/Log-out for all groups or Log-in/Log-out of a specified group .
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out of a specified group)
Press Log-in/Log-out of a specified group .
To enter/leave Not Ready mode
PT/SLT/PS /SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 3 5
Enter 735 .
1
OR
0
Not Ready
Ready
C.Tone
Enter 1 or 0 .
On-hook.
194 Operating Manual
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution
Group Monitor)
To set/cancel Not Ready mode or to leave Wrap-up mode (To enter Ready mode)
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670/S-PS
While on-hook
(Wrap-up)
Press red or flashing red Wrap-up.
*
• * The status will be as follows:
Ready Not Ready
Not Ready Ready
Wrap-up Not Ready
• The Log-in/Log-out of a specified group button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Log-in mode
Red on: Log-out mode
• The Wrap-up button alternates the setting of Wrap-up mode, Not Ready mode or Ready mode.
The Wrap-up button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Ready mode
Red on: Not Ready mode
Flashing red: Wrap-up mode
• In Wrap-up mode/Not Ready mode, your extension does not receive calls through any group, even if it belongs to multiple groups.
• The last remaining logged-in extension may not be allowed to log out, depending on system programming.
• The Supervisor extension can control the Log-in/Log-out status of other extensions.
For more information, refer to "1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an
Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor)".
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Log-in/Log-out button, a Log-in/Log-out of a specified group button or a
Wrap-up button.
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming
Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group
Monitor)
–
Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls
–
Monitoring and Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
The extension assigned as a Supervisor extension can monitor and control the status of other extensions in an incoming call distribution group. It should have a PT with 6-line display. The display and DSS buttons show as follows:
Operating Manual 195
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution
Group Monitor)
Initial Display
<Display>
Date/Time & extension no.
<DSS>
Busy Status Monitor
739
ICD Group extension no.
" EXIT "
Monitoring the
Call Status
<Display>
Queuing Monitor
<DSS>
Busy Status Monitor
Monitoring the Call Status and Log-in/Log-out Status
" SPRVS "
<Display>
Queuing Monitor
" EXIT "
<DSS>
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
" EXIT " " LOG "
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
<Display>
Call Log History
<DSS>
Busy Status Monitor
Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls
The Supervisor extension can monitor the status of calls waiting to be answered in the queue. If an incoming call distribution group has an overflowed call, the display shows the status automatically.
The following information is displayed.
<Queuing Monitor>
• The current date/time
• The ICD Group extension number/name
• The number of waiting calls
• The longest waiting time
<Call Log History>
• The date/time when cleared at last time
• The total number of received calls
• The number of overflowed calls
• The number of unanswered calls
• The average waiting time of queuing calls
To monitor
Display PT ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
Off-hook.
7 3 9
Enter 739 .
ICD Group extension no.
Enter ICD Group extension number .
C.Tone
On-hook.
196 Operating Manual
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution
Group Monitor)
To clear Call Log History
Display PT
LOG CLEAR
Press " LOG ".
Press " CLEAR ".
• The accumulated data is cleared.
"****" shows if the number to be displayed exceeds the maximum displayable digits.
Monitoring and Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
The Supervisor extension can monitor the Log-in/Log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members by the DSS button light. It can also change their Log-in/Log-out status if needed.
To monitor
Display PT
After viewing the status of waiting calls
SPRVS
Press " SPRVS ".
To change the Log-in/Log-out mode
Display PT
(DSS)
Press desired DSS .
• The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off : The extension is not in the group.
Green on : Log-in (Ready) mode
Flashing green : Log-in (Not Ready) mode
Red on : Log-out mode
Operating Manual 197
1.10.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)
1.10.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)
When your incoming call distribution group is busy and other outside calls arrive, the arriving calls are put in a waiting queue.
Extensions can check the status of the queue with the Hurry-up button light, and forward the longest waiting call in the queue to a preset destination manually.
This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.
To forward the waiting call
PT/PS
(Hurry-up)
Press red or flashing red Hurry-up .
• The Hurry-up button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No waiting call.
Red on: Some calls are waiting.
Flashing red: The number of calls exceeds the manual queue redirection level.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Hurry-up button.
198 Operating Manual
1.11 Using User-supplied Equipment
1.11 Using User-supplied Equipment
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
You can talk to a person at the door through the doorphone. Preprogrammed extensions or an outside party can receive the calls from the doorphone. You can open the door.
–
–
Doorphone Call
To call from the doorphone
Doorphone
Press doorphone button.
C.Tone
Talk.
To answer a call from the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users: If the doorphone number and name are stored in the phonebook of your phone, the doorphone information is displayed on your phone when a call arrives from the doorphone.
• For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The video feed from a network camera can be displayed on your phone’s display when a call arrives from a doorphone and the following settings are configured on your phone:
– The network camera is registered to a contact.
– The doorphone number is registered to the contact, and "Doorphone" is selected as the label for the phone number.
For details about the settings, refer to the documentation for your phone.
Operating Manual 199
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
To call the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
3
Enter 31 .
1 doorphone no.
Enter doorphone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
• If no one answers a doorphone call within a specified time period, the call is cancelled.
Opening a Door (Door Open)
Some extensions may be prohibited from using this feature.
From a specified extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
5 5
Enter 55 . doorphone no.
Enter doorphone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
5
Enter 5 .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• The door open will be triggered for a specified time period.
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
Preprogrammed extensions can switch on a relay (e.g., alarm) connected to the PBX.
200 Operating Manual
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
To switch on the relay
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
5
Enter 56 .
6 relay no.
Enter relay number
(2 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
• The relay will be switched off after a specified time period.
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
Preprogrammed extensions can receive an alert call from an external sensor (e.g., security alarm) connected to the PBX.
To answer a sensor call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
D.Tone
Off-hook.
On-hook.
• If you do not answer a sensor call within a specified time period, the sensor call will stop.
Dial Tone Definitions
•
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
–
Accessing External Services (External Feature Access [EFA])
Accessing External Services (External Feature Access [EFA])
You can access special features (e.g., Call Waiting) offered by a host PBX or telephone company. This feature is only effective for an outside call.
Operating Manual 201
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
<Example> To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS/KX-UT series/S-PS
During a conversation with an outside party
SLT
During a conversation with an outside party
OR
(EFA)
OR
6 0 desired service code
6 0 desired service code
Press FLASH/RECALL or EFA .
Or press TRANSFER and then enter 60 .
Enter desired service code .
Press Recall/ hookswitch .
For KX-UT series or S-PS, press FLASH/RECALL .
Enter 60 .
Enter desired service code .
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone, KX-UT series SIP phone, or S-PS must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system programming.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
You or an outside party can access the Voice Processing System from a telephone.
–
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail Integration)
If your PBX has a Panasonic Voice Processing System connected (e.g., KX-TVM series) using digital integration, the following features are also available:
–
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
–
• Voice Processing System features are not available for SIP phone and S-PS users.
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail Integration)
–
To forward your calls to your mailbox
–
To transfer a call to a mailbox
–
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
202 Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages (Voice Mail Transfer). The duration for recording depends on the Voice Processing System. Using the Voice Mail Transfer button, you can also perform the following operations with one touch (for digital integration only):
–
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
–
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
–
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
7 1
Enter 71 .
0
OR
1
OR
2
Both Calls
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
3
4
5
0
2
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number .
voice mail floating extension no.
Enter voice mail floating extension number .
#
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer .
Operating Manual 203
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
(DSS)
OR desired extension no.
Press Voice Mail
Transfer .
Press DSS or dial desired extension number .
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
Off-hook.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number or press DSS .
To listen to messages
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
MESSAGE
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR voice mail floating extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer , or enter voice mail floating extension number .
• *Indication tone after going off-hook
1 s
R.B.Tone
B.Tone
OR
DND Tone
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer .
• If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
204 Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PT/PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening .
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
Operating Manual 205
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
PT/PS
Hands-free Mode Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring
No operation
Monitoring (Hands-free) Monitoring (Handset)
SP-PHONE
OR
MONITOR
OR (Live Call
Screening)
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening .
Off-hook.
Stop monitoring Answering
SP-PHONE
OR
MONITOR
Press
SP-PHONE or MONITOR .
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening .
OR
Stop monitoring
SP-PHONE OR
MONITOR
Answering the call
Off-hook.
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR .
Off-hook.
Stop monitoring
On-hook.
Answering the call
(Live Call
Screening)
Press
Live Call
Screening .
• The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
• The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
• This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
• Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Customising Your Phone
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Live Call Screening Mode Set
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
•
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
Recording a Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
206 Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Two-way
Record)
Press Two-way Record .
To stop recording, press this button again.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Two-way
Transfer)
(DSS)
OR another extension no.
Press Two-way
Transfer .
To stop recording, press this button again.
Press DSS or enter another extension number .
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch Two-way Transfer .
• The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
• Note:
When you record your Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
Operating Manual 207
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch Twoway Transfer button.
208 Operating Manual
1.12 Administrative Features
1.12 Administrative Features
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment
(Hospitality Features)
In a hotel-type environment, an extension assigned as a hotel operator can be used to view and set the check-in/check-out/cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of each guest room extension. When the hotel operator presses a flexible button assigned as "Check-in", "Check-out", or "Cleaned-up" on his/her extension, the extension will switch to Room Status Control mode, and the light of the DSS button for each room extension will show the current room status. This allows the hotel operator to manage guests and rooms with just a telephone. In addition, the hotel operator can set automatic wake-up calls for guest rooms.
• Note:
Hospitality features cannot be used at the same time as the Supervisory Monitor (ACD)
Control feature. (Refer to "4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control".) For details, consult
your system administrator.
–
–
–
–
Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension (Remote Wake-up Call)
• The hotel operator must be using a 6-line display PT to use the Check-in, Check-out, and
Cleaned-up features.
• While in Room Status Control mode: a.
The hotel operator’s extension can only check extensions in/out and ready/not ready.
All other operations will be ignored.
b.
The light of each DSS button shows the room status of the corresponding extension as follows:
Off: Checked-out and Ready
Flashing Red: Checked-out and Not Ready
Red on: Checked-in c.
The lights of other buttons may not show their normal display.
d.
The hotel operator’s extension is considered to be busy. Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone.
Check-in
The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions to check-in by using the Check-in button assigned on his/her extension.
Operating Manual 209
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
To check in
Display PT
While on-hook
(Check-in)
Press Check-in .
ENTER extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS .
YES
Press "YES" .
EXIT
OR
(Check-in)
Press " EXIT" or Check-in .
• After check-in, Remote Extension Dial Lock is deactivated, and the guest can make outside
calls from the room extension. (Refer to "2.1.1 Extension Control".)
• After check-in, all billing data previously charged to the extension will be cleared automatically.
• When the room status of extensions is changed, detailed room status information is recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date Time Ext
02/02/00 03:07PM 1234
CO Dial Number
Check in
Check-out
The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions to check-out by using the Check-out button assigned on his/her extension.
Depending on the setting of the PBX, the hotel operator can do the following:
• Record/edit charges for Minibar/Others
• Print out an invoice containing charge information
210 Operating Manual
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
To check out a room with/without printing an invoice
Display PT
While on-hook
To check out with an invoice
PRINT NEXT
(Check-out)
Press Check-out .
ENTER extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS .
Press "PRINT" .
Press "NEXT" .
OR
To check out without an invoice
NEXT
Press "NEXT" .
EXIT
YES
Press "YES" .
OR
(Check-out)
Press " EXIT" or Check-out .
To record/edit room charges and check out a room with/without printing an invoice
Display PT
While on-hook
(Check-out)
Press Check-out .
ENTER extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS .
minibar charge
Enter minibar charge .
Press Down .
To check out with an invoice
PRINT NEXT other charges
Enter other charges .
Press "PRINT" .
Press "NEXT" .
OR
To check out without an invoice
NEXT
Press "NEXT" .
YES
Press "YES" .
EXIT
OR
(Check-out)
Press " EXIT" or Check-out .
Operating Manual 211
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
• After check-out, Remote Extension Dial Lock is activated, and outside calls from the room
extension are restricted. (Refer to "2.1.1 Extension Control".)
• After check-out, wake-up call and Call Log information for the room extension are cleared automatically. In addition, features set on the room extension are reset to the default
settings. For a list of features that are reset, refer to "1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your
Extension (Extension Feature Clear)".
• When the room status of extensions is changed, detailed room status information is recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date Time Ext
02/03/00 08:08AM 1234
CO Dial Number
Check out
• To print out an invoice, a printer should be connected to the PBX. If the room extension is in use, an invoice cannot be printed out.
<Example>
****************************************
* Hotel *
****************************************
Check in : 01.JAN.00 06:31PM
Check out : 03.JAN.00 07:03AM
Room : 202 : Mr. Smith
01/01/00 06:52PM 202 01 Call amount:0012
02/01/00 06:07PM 202 01 123456789
02/01/00 07:30PM 202 01 012345678901234
02/01/00 08:45PM 202 01 0011234567890123
01:24'30 FR00084.50 001
00:10'12 FR00010.20 1234567890
00:06'36 FR00006.60 12345
00:03'00 FR00003.00 12345
Telephone
Minibar
Others
Total
104.30 (Tax 10.000% = 9.48)
4.00 (Tax 10.000% = 0.36)
0.00 (Tax 15.000% = 0.00)
FR 108.30 (Tax Total = 9.84)
Sheet : 002
======= Hotel PBX =======
Tel: +41 3 12 34 56 78 Fax: +41 3 12 34 56 78
E-Mail: 12345678 hotelpbx.ch
• The PBX can store a limited amount of room information. When this storage becomes almost full, the information of the extension that made the most calls is printed out automatically. In this case, the printout is similar to the example above, but without categorised charge information and the total. The PBX can then store new room information.
"Call amount:0012" in the example above indicates that the information of 12 phone calls has previously been printed out automatically.
212 Operating Manual
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension (Remote Wake-up Call)
The hotel operator can remotely set or cancel a Timed Reminder to a room extension. This allows guests to request wake-up calls without having to program the extension themselves. The hotel operator can also confirm the current Timed Reminder setting for a room extension.
To set
PT
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Check-in or a Check-out button.
Off-hook.
7 6
Enter 76 .
1
Enter 1 . extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number or press desired DSS .
hour/minute
0
OR
1
AM
PM
OR hour/minute
Enter hour (01–12) and minute (00–59) and then
0 for AM or 1 for PM.
Or enter hour (00–23) and minute (00–59).
0
OR
1
Once
Daily
Enter 0 for once or 1 for daily.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• * Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX (12-hour or 24-hour).
To cancel
PT
Off-hook.
7 6
Enter 76 .
0
Enter 0 . extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number or press desired DSS .
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operating Manual 213
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
To confirm
Display PT
Off-hook.
7 6
Enter 76 .
2
Enter 2 . extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number or press desired DSS .
The display shows
Timed Reminder information.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• Timed Reminder can also be set from the room extension. (For information about setting
Timed Reminder, refer to "1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)".) The most recent
setting will be valid no matter which extension made the setting.
• When a Timed Reminder starts, and when it is answered or not answered, detailed Timed
Reminder information is recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date Time Ext
02/02/00
02/02/00
02:45PM
02:47PM
1234
1234
CO Dial Number
Timed Reminder/Start
Timed Reminder/Answer
• Users of PTs without displays can confirm only whether a Timed Reminder has been set or not by following the steps shown above. If set, a confirmation tone will be heard.
Cleaned-up
The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions depending on whether the room has been cleaned or not by using the Cleaned-up button assigned on his/her extension. This allows the hotel operator to confirm that the room is clean and ready for the next guest.
To change the cleaning status of a room
Display PT
While on-hook
EXIT
(Cleaned-up)
Press
Cleaned-up .
ENTER extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS .
OR
(Cleaned-up)
Press " EXIT" or Cleaned-up .
214 Operating Manual
1.12.2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message)
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Cleaned-up button.
1.12.2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages
(Printing Message)
You can record a variety of information from your extension using up to 8 preprogrammed messages.
Message information from all extensions is recorded with the PBX. For example, it is possible to use this feature as a time card by selecting preprogrammed "sign in" and "sign out" messages.
In a hotel-type environment, this feature can be used to record room information from a room extension.
For a list of preprogrammed messages, consult your dealer.
To record
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
7 6 1
Enter 761 .
message no.
Enter message number (1 – 8). parameter
*
Enter parameter if required.
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• * Depending on the content of the selected message, you may be required to enter a numeric parameter, such as a price or time. Enter the correct number of characters as required for the message. For information about required parameters, consult your dealer.
<Example>
If "Snack %%.%%" has been programmed as message number 1 (for recording charges for room snacks consumed), hotel employees would enter data as in the example below using the room extension:
761 1 message no.
0300 # parameter
(Snack charge)
• When a preprogrammed message is selected, detailed information is recorded automatically, as shown below:
Date Time Ext
02/02/00 10:45AM 1234
CO Dial Number
Snack 03.00
• Any charges recorded here are not related to charges that the hotel operator records when checking out a room.
Operating Manual 215
1.13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions
1.13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions
1.13.1 Walking Extension
You can exchange the settings set at another extension with your own settings. This allows you to use your own settings, including your extension number, on another person’s extension. Settings such as extension number and One-touch Dialling memory are available at the new extension. It is also possible to exchange the DSS Console settings along with the extension settings. Walking Extension is useful, for example, when you move to a new location in the office.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
To exchange your settings with another extension
PT/SLT PIN: Personal Identification Number
7 2 7
Off-hook.
Enter 727 .
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
D.Tone
your extension no.
Dial your extension number.
On-hook.
•
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to "
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification
Number])" in "3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)".
• Your previous extension will receive the old settings of your new extension.
• Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
• If you are using a KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephone with a Bluetooth wireless headset, and exchange the settings with another
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephone user, you cannot use your Bluetooth wireless headset at the other extension.
Bluetooth wireless headsets are registered on extensions themselves. Therefore, you have to register a Bluetooth wireless headset on each desired extension. For details about
registration, refer to "Bluetooth Registration" in "3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
In addition to exchanging the settings between extensions (Walking Extension), you can change the status of your extension to "Service-in" or "Service-out" (Enhanced Walking Extension).
Service-in: An extension is in use (normal status).
Service-out:
Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension
Lock (→ 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode) are activated on an extension. When the extension is
set to "Service-out", the extension user cannot do the following:
• Make unauthorised outside calls
• Receive calls
• See their personal speed dialling directory, or call log
216 Operating Manual
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
This feature is useful when: a.
one person uses the same extension settings at different locations, such as another branch office or at home b.
two or more people use the same telephone in turn
<Example (a)> When using extension settings at a different location
Main Office
Service-in
Service-out Service-out
Extension status of Telephone A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Branch Office
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension status of Telephone B
Service-out Service-out Service-in
In this example, extension user A sets his/her own extension status to "Service-out" at the main office. Then, he/she can set another extension status to "Service-in" at the branch office to have his/her own extension settings available at the extension.
<Example (b)> When two users share one telephone
User A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extension
Status
Service-in Service-out Service-in
User B
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-in
In this example, extension users A and B work in shifts and use the same extension in turn. User A sets the extension status to "Service-out" when he/she finishes work. Then, user B can set the extension status to
"Service-in" and have his/her own settings available at the extension.
Operating Manual 217
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
To set an extension to Service-out status
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
7 2 7
Enter 727 .
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
To set an extension to Service-in status and have your own settings available
PT/SLT PIN: Personal Identification Number
7 2 7 your extension no.
Off-hook.
Enter 727 .
Enter .
Dial your extension number.
extension PIN
C.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
On-hook.
•
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to "
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification
Number])" in "3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)".
• Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
218 Operating Manual
1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display
1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
This is available for display proprietary telephones, portable stations, KX-UT series SIP phones, and S-PSs.
–
Calling with the Incoming Call Log
–
Calling with the Outgoing Call Log
• PS and S-PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
• KX-UT series SIP phone users: Both outside call information and intercom call information is recorded automatically in the incoming call log. For details about using the call log, refer to the documentation for your KX-UT series SIP phone.
• The following PSs can use the incoming call log information in the same way as a wired PT when they receive a call from other extension (including TIE).
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
• PSs other than these may not display the same incoming call log information as a PT connected to the PBX.
• For details about referencing the incoming call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
Calling with the Incoming Call Log
When you receive a call, including external sensor calls, call information is recorded automatically in the incoming call log. A preprogrammed number of calls can be logged per extension.
When the call log is full and other call arrives, the oldest call is deleted.
You can modify the logged telephone number.
When the Call Log button light turns on, there is a call which you did not answer.
The following information is logged.
• Caller’s Name
• Date/Time call received
• Answered or Not Answered
Confirmed or Not Confirmed
• Caller’s Phone Number
To confirm the log information with the Call Log button
Display PT
While on-hook
(Call Log)
Press Call Log until desired party appears.
Operating Manual 219
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
To confirm the log information with the Navigator Key
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left twice.
Press Up or Down until desired party appears.
To clear the log information
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log , or Up or Down until desired party appears.
Press TRANSFER .
To call
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log , or Up or Down until desired party appears.
Off-hook.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialling
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log , or Up or Down until desired party appears.
Press STORE .
220 Operating Manual
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
• The Call Log button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No incoming call. Or you have already viewed the call log.
Red on: You have missed calls to view.
• If your call is answered by another extension, the caller’s information is recorded on the displays of both your extension and the answering extension.
• You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number), so that you can prohibit access to your logged information (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• You can also have a Call Log button for an ICD Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group).
• If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the caller’s information.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Call Log button or Call Log for ICD Group button.
Calling with the Outgoing Call Log
You can redial using the outgoing call log.
To call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left .
Press Up or Down until desired name and/or number * appears.
Off-hook.
• The following PSs can use outgoing call log information to other extensions (including TIE) with same information as a PT connected to the PBX.
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
• PSs other than these may not display the same outgoing call log information as a PT connected to the PBX.
• For details about referencing the outgoing call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
• * When an outside call is made from the Outgoing Call Log, if a name is registered to the
Personal/System Speed Dialling entry, the name is displayed on the LCD of the display PT making the call.
Operating Manual 221
1.14.2 Using the Directories
To call with the REDIAL button
Display PT
While on-hook
REDIAL REDIAL
Press REDIAL to display the outgoing call log.* 1
Press REDIAL .
Press Up or Down until desired name and/or number * 2 appears.
Off-hook.
• This operation is available only for PTs with a display.
• *1 System programming is required for this operation.
• *2 After an outside call is made from the Outgoing Call Log, when another call is made using the REDIAL button, if a name is registered to the Personal/System Speed Dialling entry, the name is displayed on the LCD of the display PT making the call.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialling
Display PT
When the desired party is displayed
Press STORE .
• You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number), so that you can prohibit access to your logged information (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the caller’s information.
1.14.2 Using the Directories
You can call using the directories ( Personal Speed Dialling Directory, System Speed Dialling Directory and
Extension Number Directory ).
Only personal directories can be stored, edited or deleted on your extension.
If a call arrives while you are using a directory, the display will be replaced with the caller’s information.
–
–
–
• PS users: Refer to the documentation for your PS.
222 Operating Manual
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Calling with the Directory
To select and call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right until desired directory appears.* 1
Press Up or Down until desired name and/or number * 2 appears.
Off-hook.
• *1 The display order is as follows:
One time: Personal Speed Dialling Directory
Two times: System Speed Dialling Directory
Three times: Extension Number Directory
• *2 If a name is registered to the directory entry, the name is displayed on a display PT’s
LCD when the directory is displayed. When a call is established, if the name of the person who answered the call is received over the line, it is displayed instead of the name registered in the directory.
If a name is registered to the directory entry, the name can be searched for by entering the first 1–6 alphanumeric characters of the name on the directory access screen, and then pressing ENTER or Select (soft button).
When an outside call is made using a directory, if a name is registered to the directory entry, the name is displayed on the second line of a display PT’s LCD. The name is not displayed on a phone with a one line LCD.
• To cancel or exit, press the CANCEL or FLASH/RECALL button.
• You can lock your personal speed dialling directory by using an extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number), so that you can prohibit access to it (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• Directory entries generally should include name and number. If the name is not registered, an entry cannot be displayed.
• The System Speed Dialling Directory can be displayed simply by pressing the AUTO DIAL/
STORE button while on-hook.
Operating Manual 223
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Storing Names and Numbers
To store a Personal Speed Dialling Directory item
Display PT
While on-hook phone no.
OR name
OR
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Press ENTER or STORE .
Enter name
(max. 20 characters).
Press ENTER or STORE .
• Telephone numbers and names displayed are stored using the first spare Personal Speed
Dialling memory available.
•
For more details, refer to "To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling" in
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
Entering Characters
You can enter the following characters. The tables show you the characters available for each button. Table
1 or Table 2 can be programmed.
224 Operating Manual
Table 1 (Standard mode)
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Operating Manual 225
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Table 1 (Standard mode for RU model)
226 Operating Manual
Table 2 (Option mode)
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Operating Manual 227
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Table 2 (Option mode for CE model)
228 Operating Manual
Table 2 (Option mode for GR model)
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Operating Manual 229
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
Table 2 (Option mode for RU model)
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
You can access a feature with the "Feature Access" menu.
To access "Feature Access" menu and select the feature
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right four times.
Press Up or Down until the feature appears.
Features
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
Group Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Refer to
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
230 Operating Manual
Paging
Doorphone Call
Features
Door Open
External Relay
External Background Music
KX-UT series
While on-hook
Menu
OR
Press " Menu ".
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
Refer to
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
OR
Press Up or Down until the feature appears.*
Features
Group Paging
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Group Call Pickup
Data Line Security
Refer to
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data
• * For KX-UT670 users:
Tap the feature access code instead of pressing Up or Down .
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-
NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
The KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 IP-PT and KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone have flexible buttons with an LCD screen next to the buttons.
For KX-NT366:
The KX-NT366 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to display 3 other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 48 flexible buttons are available.
Operating Manual 231
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales
LCS
PDN
Page 4
Page 3
Page 2
CO 6
CO 5
CO 4
CO 3
CO 2
For KX-NT553/KX-NT556:
The KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to display other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments as below.
KX-NT553
KX-NT556
Pages
2
3
Total Flexible Buttons
24
36
Example: KX-NT556
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales
LCS
PDN
Page 3
Page 2
CO 6
CO 5
CO 4
CO 3
CO 2
For KX-NT560:
The KX-NT560 IP-PT has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page key to display 3 other sets
(pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 32 flexible buttons are available.
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
Page 4
Page 3 Headset Company-A
Page 2
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
Wrap-up
Headset
Log-in
Wrap-up
Log-in
S-CO5
Company-B
Company-A
Company-C
Company-B
Company-D
Company-C
Log-out
S-CO6
Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO4 S-CO8
For KX-UT248:
The KX-UT248 SIP phone has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page keys to display
2 other sets (pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 24 flexible buttons are available.
232 Operating Manual
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
Page 3 Headset Company-A
Page 2
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
Wrap-up
Headset
Log-in
Wrap-up
Log-in
S-CO5
Company-B
Company-A
Company-C
Company-B
Company-D
Company-C
Log-out
S-CO6
Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO4 S-CO8
For KX-UT670:
The KX-UT670 SIP phone has 24 flexible buttons. Each button can be assigned a feature, telephone number, extension number, etc., with a custom label for each. You can switch the display between singlerow display and full-screen display. In single-row display, 6 flexible buttons are displayed, and you can press the Page key to display another row of buttons. In full-screen display, all 24 flexible buttons are displayed at once.
Row 1
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
Row 4
Row 3
Row 2
DN-1
DN-1
DN-3
DN-4
To switch display
KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670
OR OR OR
Press NEXT PAGE or Page key to display the desired page.
OR
• For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users:
– When you answer an incoming call or when you seize an outside line, the display automatically changes to the page that contains the green lit button.
– After customising each button, you can set the displayed text for the button. For details
about customising buttons, refer to "3.1.3 Customising the Buttons".
• For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users:
– You can customise the flexible buttons and set the displayed text for each button using
Web Maintenance Console. For details about customising buttons, refer to "Customising
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console" in
– For the KX-UT248, the display shows a maximum of 10 characters for each button. For the KX-UT670, you can specify up to 12 characters, but some characters may not be displayed depending on the characters used.
Operating Manual 233
1.15 Cellular Phone Features
1.15 Cellular Phone Features
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
When you are not at your desk or not in the office and receive a forwarded outside call on your cellular phone, you can use the following features if enabled through system programming.
–
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
–
–
–
–
–
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Paging and then Transferring a Call
• Some features may not be available for cellular phones, depending on the type of outside line being used.
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
Enter # .
D.Tone
extension no.
Dial extension number .
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
• When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, you cannot talk to the destination party after dialling an extension number.
• You cannot transfer a call to a DISA floating extension number.
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
During a conversation, you can make a call to an extension connected to another PBX in a private network and transfer a call to it.
234 Operating Manual
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
Enter # .
D.Tone
extension no.
*
OR private phone no.
*
7
Dial extension number or enter 7 and the dial private phone number.
The party is placed on hold.
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
On-hook.
• * When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, you cannot talk to the destination party after dialling an extension number or 7 + private phone number.
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
During a conversation, you can make a call to an outside phone number and transfer a call to it.
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
Enter # .
D.Tone
The party is placed on hold.
0 /
OR
9 outside phone no.
8 outside line group no.
Dial outside phone number .
Enter automatic line access number or enter outside line group access number and then outside line group number .
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
• When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, you cannot talk to the destination party after dialling the outside phone number.
Operating Manual 235
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
To establish a conference call
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
Enter # .
D.Tone
extension no.
Dial extension number .
Talk to the new party.
Enter # .
3
C.Tone
Enter 3 .
Talk with multiple parties.
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
OR extension no.
D.Tone
Enter # . Dial extension number .
Talk to the other party.
Enter # .
Talk to the original party.
The other party will be on hold.
236 Operating Manual
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
3 3
D.Tone
Enter # .
The party is placed on hold.
Enter 33 .
paging group no.
C.Tone
Dial paging group number (2 digits).
Announce.
Wait for an answer.
Talk.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension are connected and start a conversation.
Operating Manual 237
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
238 Operating Manual
Section 2
Manager Operation
This section shows the manager how to control the other extensions or the PBX.
Operating Manual 239
2.1 Control Features
2.1 Control Features
2.1.1 Extension Control
The manager extension can control the settings of other extensions.
–
Changing the Settings of Other Extensions
Changing the Settings of Other Extensions
To lock/unlock other extensions (Remote Extension Dial Lock)
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 8
Enter 78 .
2
OR
3
Unlock
Lock
Enter 2 to unlock or 3 to lock.
extension no.
C.Tone
Enter extension number .
On-hook.
• The manager can use Remote Extension Dial Lock to unlock any extension, whether that extension was locked remotely (Remote Extension Dial Lock) or from the extension itself
(Extension Dial Lock).
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
The manager extension or the preprogrammed extension can change the time mode (Day, Lunch, Break or
Night).
There are two methods (Automatic or Manual) of changing the time modes.
Automatic: enables the time mode for each day of the week to change automatically. You may also change it manually.
Manual: enables to change a mode manually as follows.
To change the time mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break) until the desired mode appears.
240 Operating Manual
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
7 8 0
Enter 780.
2
3
0
1
Day
Night
Lunch
Break
Enter 0 to 3 as you desire .
C.Tone
On-hook.
To select the time service switching mode (Automatic/Manual)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual))
Press Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual) .
• Besides the time mode, there is Holiday mode. It can change mode once on a specified date.
• The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
• The Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Automatic
Red on: Manual
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button or a Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)
The manager extension can change the restriction level, permitting an extension to make a call.
Operating Manual 241
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
PT/PS
During a conversation with an extension
(Toll Restriction/
Call Barring)
C.Tone
Press Toll Restriction/
Call Barring .
On-hook.
The extension can hear the dial tone and then make a call.
• The restriction level is changed to the preprogrammed level of Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.
• The restriction level of SIP phones and S-PSs cannot be changed.
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
The manager extension can select and broadcast background music in the office through external speakers.
To select and start/stop the background music
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
3
Enter 35.
5 external pager no.
OR
Enter external pager number (2 digits: 01–96) or for all.
BGM no.
OR
0
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to stop.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• One-look Network
In a One-look network, pagers are numbered sequentially based on the site number and the pager's
The following matrix shows how pagers are numbered.
Pager Numbering
Port
No.
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Site ID
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
5
2
3
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
55
57
58
59
60
62
63
64
65
67
68
69
70
72
73
74
75
77
78
79
80
82
83
84
85
87
88
89
90
92
93
94
95
242 Operating Manual
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
Port
No.
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Site ID
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
21 26 31 36 41 46 51 56 61 66 71 76 81 86 91 96
*1
The number of ports available at each site depends on the type of PBX (e.g., KX-NS300, KX-NS1000)for the site. For details, consult your system administrator.
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
The manager extension can record three kinds of greeting messages (OGM) as follows:
1.
DISA message : Used to greet and guide callers so that they access an extension user group or outside party without operator assistance.
2.
Incoming Call Distribution Group message : Used to greet and guide callers to an incoming call distribution group.
3.
Timed Reminder message : Used for a wake-up call message when the extension answers the Timed Reminder.
All messages have their own extension numbers. You can select the desired message. You have two methods for recording a message. One is recorded using the handset, and the other is recorded from an external BGM (MOH) port. If your PBX is connected to other KX-NS1000 PBX(s) in a network, please specify the site ID for recording.
To record
PT
Off-hook.
3 6
Enter 36 .
To specify a site ID
(if necessary)
9 site ID
Enter 9 and site ID (2 digits: 01–16).
1
Enter 1 .
OGM floating extension no.
Enter OGM floating extension number .
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
Record message.
Press STORE .
C.Tone
When the time limit passes, it stops automatically.
The message is played back.
On-hook.
Operating Manual 243
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
To play back
PT
Off-hook.
3
Enter 36 .
6
To specify a site ID
(if necessary)
9 site ID
Enter 9 and site ID (2 digits: 01–16).
2
Enter 2 .
OGM floating extension no.
Enter OGM floating extension number .
C.Tone
The message is played back.
On-hook.
To record from an external BGM (MOH) port
PT
Off-hook.
3 6
Enter 36 .
To specify a site ID
(if necessary)
9 site ID
Enter 9 and site ID (2 digits: 01–16).
3
Enter 3 .
1
Enter 1 as BGM port number .
OGM floating extension no.
Enter OGM floating extension number .
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
You hear the message.
Press CONF .
C.Tone
The message is recorded.
Press STORE .
When the time limit passes, it stops automatically.
The message is played back.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To clear the message
PT
3 6
Off-hook.
Enter 36 .
OGM floating extension no.
Enter OGM floating extension number .
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
On-hook.
To specify a site ID
(if necessary)
9 site ID
Enter 9 and site ID (2 digits: 01–16).
0
Enter 0 .
244 Operating Manual
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out)
• The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line
(Trunk Busy Out)
When a problem is found on a certain outside line, the PBX automatically makes it unavailable for use temporarily. The manager can manually enable the outside line and allow users to use it again.
To re-enable an outside line
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
7 8 5
Enter 785 .
outside line no.
Enter outside line number
(3 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
• In some countries/areas, the PBX may not be able to automatically make a faulty outside line unavailable for use.
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
NDSS buttons can be customised on any extension connected to your PBX. An
NDSS button allows an extension user to monitor another extension connected to another PBX in a private network. The NDSS button light shows the current status of the monitored extension in the same way as a DSS button. When it becomes unnecessary to monitor an extension connected to another PBX, the manager can stop the PBX from monitoring it. Any NDSS buttons set to monitor that extension will also stop monitoring.
PT/PS
Off-hook.
7 8
Enter 784 .
4 another PBX extension no.
OR
(NDSS)
Dial another PBX extension number and then enter #, or press NDSS .
C.Tone
On-hook.
• To restart monitoring of an extension after performing this operation, go off-hook, press the corresponding NDSS button, and go on-hook.
Operating Manual 245
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
Customising Your Phone
•
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
246 Operating Manual
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
2.2.1 System Manager Features
The System Manager can configure mailboxes, change class of service (COS) settings for subscribers, etc.
–
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
–
–
–
–
–
–
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
Changing the System Manager’s Password
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the System Manager to use a telephone, however, many of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the System Manager must log in before performing any System Manager tasks. To log in as the System Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the
UM group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the System Manager’s mailbox number, and the System Manager’s mailbox password.
– The System Manager’s mailbox number is 999 (default) depending on the mailbox number length specified in system programming.
– The System Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance
Console or by the System Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
• Before the System Manager can perform any System Manager tasks, "System Manager
Access from Telephone" must be enabled and "Password for System Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)" must be set by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
• After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox settings and COS settings for the System Manager.
• If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
System Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the System
Manager’s COS.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
Operating Manual 247
2.2.1 System Manager Features
•
For more information on logging in, refer to "Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time".
• Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the following order:
Subscriber service Message Manager service System Manager service
• For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
UM group’s floating extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer , or enter UM group’s floating extension number .
# 6
Enter #6 .
System Manager password #
Enter System Manager password and # .
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox
System Manager’s mailbox no.
Enter and System Manager’s mailbox number (default: 999).
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system from the preprogrammed outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
System Manager password #
Enter System Manager password and # .
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox
248 Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not allowed access to your extension.
Setting Up Mailboxes
The System Manager’s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system organisation by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can create and edit subscriber mailboxes by following the steps below.
When creating a new mailbox, or editing a mailbox’s parameters, the following parameters can be set:
• Mailbox Number
• Subscriber’s Name:
The system allows a maximum of 10 seconds for each name. The name should be spoken slowly and clearly. (We recommend using the subscriber’s last name.)
• Extension Number
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s Last Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the owner’s last name.
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s First Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the subscriber’s first name.
• Class of Service Number:
Enter any COS number (1–62).
• Interview Mailbox Number:
Interview Mailbox Numbers must not be the same number as an existing mailbox.
• All Calls Transfer To Mailbox (Change Logical Extension Status):
If this parameter is enabled, the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension mailbox. The extension does not ring when a call is received.
• Message Waiting Lamp Notification:
If this parameter is enabled, the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new message is recorded.
• External Message Delivery:
Allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non-subscribers (including outside parties). If enabled, the prompt mode setting determines the language heard when the system calls the recipient.
• Auto Forwarding:
Operating Manual 249
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Moves or copies unplayed messages from one mailbox to another, after a specified period of time.
To create/edit/delete any mailbox parameter
To exit
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
STEP A
5 1
Enter 51 .
1
STEP B subscriber's mailbox no.
Enter 1 to assign or edit.
Enter the subscriber's mailbox number .
2
Enter 2 to accept.
Enter .
Follow system prompts and set each parameter below.
Parameters
Subscriber’s Name
Extension Number
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s Last Name
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s First Name
Class of Service Number
Interview Mailbox Number
All Calls Transfer To Mailbox
(Change Logical Extension
Status)
Steps
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2.
Record the subscriber’s name.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2.
Enter the subscriber’s extension number.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2.
Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s last name.
3.
2 to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2.
Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s first name.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2.
Enter the Class of Service Number (1–62).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1.
1
2.
Enter the Interview Mailbox Number.
3.
2
to accept.
1
to change the current setting.
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
250 Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Message Waiting Lamp
Notification
Device Notification for
Unreceived Messages
External Message Delivery
Prompt Mode
Auto Forwarding
Forwarding Mailbox Number
Forwarding Delay Time
Forwarding Mode
Steps
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1 to change the current setting (enable or disable).
•
If set to "Enable", go to " Prompt Mode
".
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1 for Primary.
2
for System.
3
for Caller Select.
• For System, enter the system prompt number (1–8).
2.
4
to accept the current setting, then go to "
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
• If set to "Disable":
The Auto Forwarding parameter is the last parameter to be entered.
To continue assigning or editing other mailboxes, go back to
STEP B .
To finish, enter .
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2.
Enter the forwarding mailbox number.
3.
2 to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2.
Enter the delay time, and
#
.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (Copy or Move).
2.
2
to accept, then go to " Auto Forwarding
".
To delete a mailbox
The System Manager should delete mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another person accesses the Unified Messaging system, the action is automatically cancelled.
Operating Manual 251
2.2.1 System Manager Features
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5 1 2
3.
Enter the mailbox number.
4.
1 to delete the mailbox.
To reset a mailbox password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must reset the password before it can be reassigned by the subscriber.
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5 1 3
3.
Enter the mailbox number.
4.
1
to delete the password.
• The System Manager password cannot be reset here. The System Administrator can reset the System Manager password using Web Maintenance Console.
• After the password is reset, if the System Administrator has set "Default Password for New
Mailboxes" to "Enable", the password will be set to the default password. If set to "Disable", the mailbox will have no password.
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
A Class of Service (COS) defines the set of system services available to the mailboxes assigned to it. There are 514 Classes of Service; they can be assigned to mailboxes by the System Administrator using Web
Maintenance Console or by the System Manager using a telephone. COS No. 513 and No. 514 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot set COS parameters. The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
To set COS parameters
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5 2
Enter 52 . class of service no.
Enter the class of service number (1–64).
Follow system prompts and set each parameter below.
252 Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Personal Greeting Length
New Message Retention
Time
Saved Message Retention
Time
Message Length
Total Message Time
Available per Mailbox
Message Retrieval Order
Prompt Mode
Delete Message
Confirmation
Steps
1.
1
2
to change the greeting length.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the greeting length (1–360 s).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
2
to change the retention time.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
to change the retention time.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
2
1
2
to change the message length.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the message length (1–60 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
2
to change the total message time.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the total message time (1–600 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (LIFO [Last In First Out] or
FIFO [First In First Out]).
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Primary.
2 for System.
• For System, enter system prompt number (1–8).
2.
3
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Operating Manual 253
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Message Envelope Playback
Mode
Caller ID Callback
Play System Prompt after
Message Cancel for Live
Intercom Paging Group
Maximum Number of Caller
IDs for Caller Name
Mailbox Capacity Warning
Personal Greeting for Caller
Steps
1.
3
4
1
2
for Before.
for After.
for Require.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
4
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
2
to change the paging group.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the group number (1–33).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
2
to change the current setting.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the number of announcements that can be programmed by subscribers (1–30/0: None).
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
2
to change the current setting.
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
Enter the warning threshold (1–60 min or 0: None).
3.
2 to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
254 Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Call Transfer to Outside
Subscriber Tutorial
Notify of Transfer
Directory Listing
Auto Receipt
Autoplay New Message
First Playback Urgent
Messages
Announce Message
Transferred Information
Caller ID Announcement
Announce Option Menu
After Erasing Messages
New Message Length
Announcement
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
Steps
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
1
2
to accept.
for Normal Mode.
for Simplified Mode.
to disable.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2
to accept.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2
to accept.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2
to accept.
1
2
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
to accept.
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
to accept.
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
to accept.
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
to accept.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2
to accept.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2
to accept.
*1 Not available for COS No. 513 (Message Manager) and COS No. 514 (System Manager)
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
You can set the time service mode from an outside telephone even when you are away from the office.
To set the time service mode
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
Operating Manual 255
2.2.1 System Manager Features
2.
4
3.
Enter the tenant number and
#
4.
1
to change.
5.
Select the desired Time Service mode entry.
1
to set Day mode.
2
to set Night mode.
3
to set Lunch mode.
4
to set Break mode.
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
When the Unified Messaging system answers calls, it greets the callers with a Company Greeting and then activates an Incoming Call Service. The System Manager or System Administrator can choose:
– The appropriate company greeting for each time mode (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break) of each call service. The default company greeting is Company Greeting 1. If the Company Greeting 1 is not recorded, nothing will not be played.
– The desired Incoming Call Service for each time mode of each call service. The default service is Custom
Service 1 for Day/Lunch/Break mode, and Custom Service 2 for Night mode. If the Custom Service is not recorded, Automated Attendant service will be played.
– The assignment of the Service Group for each Unified Messaging extension number/Trunk.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting.
The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
To change the service group setting
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
a.
5 3 b.
2 to change the Service Group setting.
2.
Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
3.
Select the desired Time Service period entry.
1
for Day Time service.
2
for Night Time service.
3
for Lunch Time service.
4
for Break Time service.
4.
1
2
to change the Company Greeting.
to change the Incoming Call Service, then go to step 5.b.
a.
1
2
to change the setting.
to accept.
5.
Select the desired setting entry.
256 Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
8.
1
2
3
to change a Company Greeting number.
to set the System Greeting, then go to step 8.
to disable, then go to step 8.
a.
Enter a Company Greeting number (1–32), then go to step 8.
b.
1
2
to change the setting.
to accept.
6.
Select the desired setting entry.
1
to set Voice Mail Service, then go to step 8.
2
to set Automated Attendant Service, then go to step 8.
3
to set Custom Service.
4
to set Interview Service.
5
to set Fax Service.
6
to set Transfer to Mailbox.
7.
Enter the Custom Service number (1–200), or the Mailbox number.
2
to accept.
To change the service group assignment
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5 3
3.
1 to change the Service Group Assignment.
4.
Enter the Unified Messaging extension number.
5.
1
2
to change the service group, then go to step 6.
to accept.
6.
Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
7.
2
to accept.
Broadcasting Messages
The System Manager can deliver a message to multiple subscribers with one operation. Messages can be sent to all subscribers (Broadcasting Message feature) or to specified subscribers only. When delivering a message to specified subscribers, the System Manager can receive verification when the recipients listen to the message.
• The System Manager can set the date and time when a message is delivered. The date can be set up to one month in advance.
To deliver messages to all mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver a message to multiple subscribers with one operation. Broadcast messages have priority over other regular or urgent messages,
Operating Manual 257
2.2.1 System Manager Features but otherwise are treated like regular messages. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current system status such as remaining capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be erased, etc.
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to record a broadcast message.
4.
1 to end recording.
5.
2
to accept.
To deliver messages to specified mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscribers by specifying their mailbox numbers.
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
a.
2 2
2.
Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
• Enter by name by pressing # 1 first. Use a Mailbox Group by specifying its number.
a.
2
to accept.
b.
1
to record a message.
• Enter 2 to add mailbox numbers. Enter 3 to review the mailing list. Enter cancel message transfer.
c.
1
to end recording.
d.
2
to accept.
3.
1
• Enter
1
1
to specify the delivery time.
2
to send the message immediately, then go to step 4.
to a.
Enter the desired delivery time, then
#
.
b.
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
• This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
c.
Enter the day of the month for delivery, then
Example:
• If today is February 16 and you enter tomorrow.
1
• If today is February 16 and you enter
5
#
7
#
.
#
, the message will be delivered
, the message will be delivered on March 5.
d.
2 to accept.
4.
1
to make the message urgent.
258 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
5.
2
1
2
to continue.
to make the message private.
to continue.
Changing the System Manager’s Password
The System Manager must enter the System Manager password in order to log in before performing any
System Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max. 16 digits) password that cannot be easily guessed.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the System Manager password. The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
To change the System Manager’s password
1.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3.
1
2
to change the mailbox password.
to accept the current setting.
4.
Enter the desired password, then
#
.
5.
3
2
to accept.
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
The Message Manager can maintain the general delivery mailbox, change notification settings, record/ delete prompts, etc.
–
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox
Recording an Emergency Greeting
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the Message Manager to use a telephone, however, many of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your dealer.
Operating Manual 259
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the Message Manager must log in before performing any Message Manager tasks. To log in as the Message Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the
UM group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the Message Manager’s mailbox number, and the Message Manager’s mailbox password.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox number is 998 (default) depending on the mailbox number length specified in system programming.
– The Message Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web
Maintenance Console or by the Message Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox").
• Before the Message Manager can perform Message Management (recording Custom
Service Menus, messages, etc.), "Message Manager Access from Telephone" must be enabled and "Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)" must be set by the
System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
• After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox settings and COS settings for the Message Manager.
• If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
Message Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the Message
Manager’s COS.
•
For more information on logging in, refer to " Logging in to Your Mailbox".
• Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the following order:
Subscriber service Message Manager service System Manager service
• For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
260 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
UM group’s floating extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer , or enter UM group’s floating extension number .
Message Manager password #
Enter Message Manager password and # .
# 6
Enter #6 .
Message Manager’s mailbox no.
Enter and Message Manager’s mailbox number (default: 998).
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
Off-hook.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
UM group’s floating extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer , or enter UM group’s floating extension number .
Message Manager password #
Enter Message Manager password and # .
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
• This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
Operating Manual 261
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system from the preprogrammed outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
Message Manager password #
Enter Message Manager password and # .
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not allowed access to your extension.
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
One of the Message Manager’s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (Mailbox Groups may be used). This can be done at any time using the telephone.
To listen to messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his or her mailbox.
He or she can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if necessary, transfer them to their intended recipients.
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
1 to receive the message.
3.
Enter the desired number.
1
to listen to new messages.
2
to listen to old messages.
3
to listen to deleted messages.
4.
Enter the desired number.
1
to listen to voice messages.
2
to listen to fax message envelopes.
#
to listen to all messages.
262 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
5.
The system plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message was recorded.
1
to repeat this message.
1
2
1
to replay the previous message.
to play the next message.
3 to delete this new/old message or recover this deleted message.
4
to reply to this new/old message.
5
to transfer this new/old message.
6
to listen to the message envelope.
• System programming determines if the message envelope is played before each message, after each message, or only when you press
8
6
.
7
to rewind a voice message during playback, or print a new/old fax message after listening to a fax message envelope.
to pause or restart the message during playback.
8 4
to increase playback volume during playback.
8 5
to set a Bookmark for the voice message during voice message playback.
8 6 to start playback at the Bookmark for the voice message.
9
to fast-forward during playback.
#
to save as new (when the new message is listened).
0
to listen to the entire menu.
To transfer messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox should be transferred to their intended recipients on a regular basis. The Message Manager can add his or her own voice comments when necessary. When a message is transferred, the original message is not deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox; it must be deleted manually.
1.
Start with step 1–5 in "To listen to messages" above.
5
while listening to the message to transfer.
2.
Enter the destination mailbox number.
3.
2
to accept.
4.
2
to record a comment.
• Enter
4
1
to transfer messages without comment. Enter
to review the Mailing List.
5.
1
to end recording.
6.
2
to accept.
3
to add a mailbox number. Enter
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
The Unified Messaging system can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his or her mailbox by turning on the message waiting lamp and/or calling an external device (i.e., telephone).
Operating Manual 263
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
The Unified Messaging system can also send notification via e-mail if the System Administrator has enabled this feature.
To set notification by Message Waiting Lamp
The system lights the message waiting lamp on the Message Manager’s extension when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager’s mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialling "9/0 (default)". However, when setting this feature the extension number (not "9/0 [default]") must be specified. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• When a 6-line display PT is used, the number of new (unplayed) messages will be displayed while the message waiting lamp is lit. If the telephone has a Message button, the
Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4.
1
2
to change.
to accept.
Setting Notification by External Device
The system calls the preprogrammed telephone number when a new message is recorded in the Message
Manager’s mailbox. Set the following parameters as needed..
To assign notification numbers
A maximum of 3 telephone numbers can be set for message notification. It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not he or she wishes to enter a callback number.
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
3 to assign a telephone number.
4.
Enter the desired number.
1 to change the first telephone number.
2
to change the second telephone number.
3
to change the third telephone number.
5.
1
to change.
6.
Dial the telephone number.
7.
2
to accept.
8.
1
2
3
4
5
to change the telephone number.
to accept.
to review.
to add more digits.
to insert a pause.
264 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
6
to insert a wait for dial tone.
To set device status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The Message
Manager can enable a device according to a schedule. However, the System Administrator must first assign a destination number to the desired device.
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2 2
3.
Enter the device number (1–6).
• Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3" for "E-mail/
Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
• If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number 1, 2, or 3, you cannot set
the device status. Refer to "To assign notification numbers" to assign a telephone number.
4.
Select the desired message type.
1 to notify all messages.
2
to notify urgent messages.
5.
Select when the device will be used for message notification.
1
for schedule (a notification is sent each time a message is received, but only during the times programmed by the System Administrator).
2
for continuously.
3
for disable (notifications are not sent).
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The Message Manager can customise the Message Manager’s mailbox by changing the following parameters.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox password
– The extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3
– Telephone numbers 1 and 2 used for call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside line
– Automatic Delivery Status and Default Fax Number, used to immediately print faxes to a specified fax machine as soon as they are received in your mailbox.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot customise his or her mailbox. The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
• Message Manager’s Password:
The Message Manager must enter the Message Manager password in order to log in before performing any Message Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max.
16 digits) password that cannot be easily guessed.
• Operator’s Extensions:
When callers require help, they can dial the operator call number to be transferred to an operator. A maximum of 3 operators can be programmed for each time mode; these operators are not necessarily the same as the operator extensions programmed for the PBX. The extension assigned as Operator 1 for the day mode is designated as the Message Manager.
Operating Manual 265
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to Outside:
After programming/changing the telephone numbers used for Remote Call Forward to Outside, the
Message Manager must reset the remote call forwarding setting (refer to "
forwarding is reset. If you do not reset remote call forwarding, calls will be forwarded to the old telephone numbers.
• Default Fax Number:
To clear the default fax number, ask your System Administrator to clear it using Web Maintenance
Console.
To customise the message manager’s mailbox
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
a.
3 b.
1
2
to change the password.
to accept.
c.
Enter the password, then
#
.
d.
2 to accept.
2.
Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the operator’s extension.
2
to accept.
3
to delete, then go to step 3.
• Operator 1’s extension number cannot be deleted.
a.
Dial the extension number.
b.
2
to accept.
3.
Repeat steps 6–8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and Break
Modes for each operator.
a.
Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 1 setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to step 4.
b.
Dial the telephone number (
0
–
9
, [max. 32 digits]).
• Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an outside line).
c.
2
to accept.
4.
Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 2 setting.
2
to accept the current setting.
a.
Dial the telephone number (
0
–
9
, [max. 32 digits]).
b.
2
to accept.
266 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
5.
Enter the desired number.
1
to change automatic delivery status.
2
to accept the current setting.
6.
Enter the desired number.
1
to change the default fax number.
2
to accept the current setting.
a.
Dial the fax number (
0
–
9
, b.
2
to accept.
,
#
[max. 32 digits]).
Recording Messages
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (menus, voice labels, system prompts, and system caller names) and is also responsible for maintaining the following:
• Company Greetings:
A maximum of 32 company greetings for business/non-business and lunch/break hours as well as holidays can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
• Company Name
• Custom Service Menus:
A maximum of 200 custom service menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services they require without the need for a human operator.
• Voice Labels:
A maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice label.
• System Prompts:
The Message Manager can change system prompts by recording new prompts and restoring them.
• Multilingual Selection Menu:
With this menu, callers can select the language they prefer for voice guidance. For example, the Message
Manager can record a menu that announces:
"For English, press 7."
"For French, press 8."
• The System Caller Names:
A maximum of 200 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator. The Message
Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number.
• On Hold Announcement Menu:
With this menu, callers in a queue can listen to the announcement or music while they are on hold.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot record any messages. The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
To record menus and voice labels
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
to record messages.
3.
Enter the desired number to record.
1
for Company Greetings.
Operating Manual 267
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
for Company Name.
for Custom Service Menus.
for Voice Labels for Mailbox Groups.
for System Prompts.
for Multilingual Selection Menu.
for System Caller Names.
for On Hold Announcement Menu.
4.
For the item selected in step 3, follow these steps: a.
For Company Greetings: Enter the Company Greeting Number (1–32).
b.
For the Company Name: Go to step 5.
c.
For Custom Service Menus: Enter a Custom Service Number (1–200).
• Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
d.
For Voice Labels: Enter the number of the Mailbox Group to be labelled. (The System Administrator assigns list numbers.) e.
For the Multilingual Selection Menu: Go to step 5.
f.
For the On Hold Announcement Menu: Go to step 5.
5.
1
to change the message.
• If a message has not yet been recorded, go to step 7.
6.
1
2
to record a message.
to erase the current message, then go to step 3 or 4.
7.
1
to end recording.
8.
2
to accept.
9.
Repeat steps 4–8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or Voice Labels.
To record system prompts
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4 5
to record messages.
3.
Enter the system prompt number you want to change.
4.
To change specific prompts, go to step 5.
To change all prompts one after another without reviewing the current recording, go to step 6.
5.
To change specific prompts: a.
1 b.
Enter the prompt number you want to change (refer to "
268 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features c.
The system plays the prompt number and its prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded, the system plays the system prompt. If a prompt is turned off, "The prompt is now turned off" will play before the prompt.
d.
1
to record.
e.
c.
1 f.
2
to accept.
g.
Repeat steps 5b to 5f to record other prompts.
6.
To change all prompts one after another.
a.
2 b.
Enter the prompt number you want to change.
1
to end recording.
to change.
d.
1
to end recording.
e.
2
to accept.
f.
The system plays the next prompt number.
g.
Repeat steps 6c to 6f to record other prompts.
• It is possible to restore the original system prompts. Consult your System Administrator about this feature.
To record system caller names
Before recording System Caller Names, the associated telephone numbers must first be programmed using
Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3.
7
to modify system caller names.
4.
Enter the Caller ID List Number (1–200).
• Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
• Enter to go to step 3.
5.
1
to change the name.
• If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to step 6.
• Enter 2 to accept or 3 to erase the current name, then go to step 4.
6.
1
to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
8.
Repeat steps 4–7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
Operating Manual 269
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Remote Call Forwarding Set
The Message Manager can program his or her extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to the desired extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
• FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
• FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy.
• FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when there is no answer.
• FWD Busy or No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer.
• FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any other telephone number.
• FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
• This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• In order to use the FWD to Outside option, the ability to forward calls to trunks must be enabled through system programming.
• Before setting Remote Call Forwarding to Outside, you should first store up to 2 destination telephone numbers (refer to "
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox").
To assign Remote Call Forwarding set
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3.
Select the desired forwarding setting.
1
for FWD All.
2
for FWD Busy.
3
for FWD No Answer.
4
for FWD Busy or No Answer.
5
for FWD to Outside, then go to step 6.
6
for FWD Cancel, then go to step 9.
4.
Enter the extension number.
5.
2
to accept the extension number, then go to step 10.
• Enter
1
to change the extension number, then go to step 4.
6.
Enter the desired number.
1
for telephone number 1, then go to step 8.
2 for telephone number 2, then go to step 8.
3
for another telephone number.
270 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• Before you can forward your calls to telephone number 1 or 2, you should first store the telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature.
7.
Enter the telephone number (
0
–
9
, ). (max. 32 digits)
• Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an outside line).
8.
2 to accept, then go to step 10.
• Enter
1
to change the telephone number, then go to step 6.
9.
2
to accept.
10.
The new settings are transmitted to the system. If the setting has been completed properly, you will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call forwarding is cancelled" as appropriate.
• If the system announces, "Call forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination number.", the forwarding setting has not been completed properly, possibly because a nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Timed Reminder
The Message Manager can set or cancel the Timed Reminder. The telephone will ring at the set time according to the set mode (Once/Daily).
• This feature is not available for PSs or S-PSs.
• This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
To set/cancel
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
6
3.
Enter the desired number.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept, then go on-hook to finish.
3 to cancel (turn off), then go on-hook to finish.
4.
Enter the desired time, then
5.
Enter the desired number.*
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
6.
Enter the desired number.
1
to set once.
2 to set daily.
7.
2
to accept.
#
.
Operating Manual 271
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• * This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
The time format (12 or 24 hour) is determined by the "Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp" setting. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Day/Night Recording Menu
A Day and Night Menu can be recorded as "Custom Service 1–2" directly from the top menu.
To record
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
7
8
for Custom Service 1 Menu (Day).
for Custom Service 2 Menu (Night).
3.
1
to change the message.
4.
1
to record a message.
5.
Record the message.
6.
1 to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
• This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
Recording an Emergency Greeting
An emergency greeting can be recorded as "Company Greeting 1" directly from the top menu. The emergency greeting can be used in times such as when the company must be closed due to bad weather.
To record
1.
Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
9
3.
6.
1
4.
1 to record a message.
5.
Record the greeting.
1
to change the message.
to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
272 Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
There are over 1000 system prompts in the Unified Messaging system. These prompts can be customised by re-recording them to change their content, or can be recorded in various languages. The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 minutes.
When recording prompts in other languages, most often it is not necessary to record all prompts contained in the Unified Messaging system; recording over 1000 system prompts is a big undertaking. When a caller is connected to AA service or VM service, most likely he or she will only hear a small selection of the following prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or modify) the prompts that callers will hear.
Please change prompts to suit the application. For example, prompt no. 1211 could be re-recorded to announce, "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the Unified Messaging System".
It is possible to record the prompts you wish to modify on your computer in .wav format and upload them to the Unified Messaging system. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Prompt No.
363 Good afternoon
327
693
701
392
842
90
599
364
365
1211
973
974
221
326
1201
596
966
Modifiable Prompts
Good evening
Good morning
Welcome to the Unified Messaging System
To enter by name, press the hash sign and 1
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person's last name
For 'Q', press 7
For 'Z', press 9
Sorry, there are no more matching names
Sorry, this name cannot be found
Incorrect entry
To call the operator, press 0
Calling the operator
Please wait a moment
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
Please leave a message at the tone
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
Operating Manual 273
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Prompt No.
1026
1060
818
979
829
978
1018
558
733
VM Prompts
Prompt No.
593
219
220
1019
AA Prompts
Prompt No.
592
1224
690
1006
971
698
388
847
Modifiable Prompts
To pause and restart recording, press 2
To review, press 1
To accept, press 2
To erase and try again, press 3
To add, press 4
To erase and exit, press
To make this message private, press 1
Otherwise, press 2
Thank you for calling
Modifiable Prompts
Please enter your party's mailbox number
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person's first name
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person's first or last name
To make this message urgent, press 1
Modifiable Prompts
Please enter your party's extension
You have a call
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
To leave a message, press 1
To enter another extension, press
Sorry, this line is busy
If you would like to hold, press 1
To cancel holding, press 2 now. Otherwise, I'll try your party again.
274 Operating Manual
Section 3
Customising Your Phone & System
This section shows you how to customise your individual telephone or PBX according to your needs.
Find the desired setting and program as necessary.
Operating Manual 275
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal
Programming)
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
You can customise your telephone features. For example, you can change the initial settings or button features according to your needs.
–
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification Number])
•
If you change your desk and extension, refer to "1.13.1 Walking Extension".
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal
Identification Number])
You can assign a password to each extension.
The following features require an extension PIN.
1.
Screening calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
2.
Prohibiting other people from seeing your personal speed dialling directory, call log, and from playing back the voice messages in your message box (Display Lock)
3.
Using the same settings as your extension at other extensions (Walking Extension)
4.
Remote Control Operation (Walking COS)
5.
Extension Dial Lock Clear
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
#
Enter # .
7 9 9 1
Enter 1 . extension PIN
Enter 799 . same extension PIN
Enter same extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
#
Enter # .
C.Tone
On-hook.
276 Operating Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./S-PS PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
7 9 9
Enter 799 .
0
Enter 0 . stored extension PIN
Enter stored extension PIN .
C.Tone
On-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a.
Keeping your PIN secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your PIN regularly.
• Valid numbers for an extension PIN are "0" through "9".
• If the wrong extension PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN is locked.
• If you forget your extension PIN or your extension PIN is locked, your manager can clear the extension PIN and extension PIN lock.
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
You can programme features using the programming mode for a PT or PS.
–
–
• To exit at any time, lift the handset.
• To enter the programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users and S-PS users: You cannot programme the following features using a KX-UT series SIP phone or an S-PS. These features are programmed via
Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting Features
The default settings are shown in bold letters. For later reference, place a check mark in the boxes below to indicate your customised setting.
Notice
The default value may vary depending on country/area.
Operating Manual 277
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To enter the programming mode
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
To programme To exit
PROG.
programming input
OR selection & parameter
OR OR
PAUSE
Follow programming input .
Press ENTER or STORE .
Follow Selection
& Parameter .
Press ENTER or STORE .
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Display Contrast
Selection available
Preferred display contrast level from the 4 levels
Display Language
Selection
Which display language do you prefer?
Item
Your extension information
Display Switching Mode
Would you like the call duration to be shown automatically on the display when answering an outside call?
Programming
Input
0 0
0
0 2
0
1
3
Selection & Parameter
The display shows your PT or PS’s extension number.
<Example>
Ext 101
1 Light
2 Little Light
3
4
Little Dark
Dark
1
2
English
2nd Language
3
4
3rd Language
4th Language
5
0
1
5th Language
No—Manual (The display keeps showing all of the outside caller’s information unless you change it to the call duration manually.)
Yes—Automatic (The first line of the display will change to the call duration automatically when you answer an outside call.)
278 Operating Manual
Item
Display Backlight
Would you like to turn on the display backlight of the telephone?
Self Labelling Display
Contrast
Preferred display contrast level from the 4 levels available for Self Labelling
(KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556 only)
Programming
Input
0
0
4
5
1 1
Hot Line
Would you like to dial a preset number simply by going off-hook?
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Should you prevent your number being displayed on the called party’s telephone?
Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
Which number should be displayed on the called and calling party’s telephone?
1
1
1
2
3
4
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Selection & Parameter
0 Yes—Automatic
1 Yes—always On
No—always Off 2
1 Light
Little Light 2
3 Little Dark
4 Dark desired no. (max. 32 digits)
Available characters: 0–9, , #, P (Pause)
0 Do not use
1
0
1
0
Use
No—Allows your number to be displayed
Yes—Prevent your number being displayed
Caller ID assigned to your extension
1
Caller ID assigned on the outside line being used
Operating Manual 279
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Preferred Line Assignment
—Outgoing
Which do you prefer to seize when you go off-hook to make calls?
Preferred Line Assignment
—Incoming
Which line do you prefer to answer when you go offhook?
Alternate Receiving—Ring/
How do you prefer to receive an intercom call?
Should the single line
telephone in parallel ring?
Programming
Input
1
2
2
2
9
0
1
2
0
1
2
+
The CO line no.
assigned to the flexible button or
Selection & Parameter
No line
An idle outside line
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3 or
(PDN)
Intercom (On a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected when going offhook.)
0
1
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the flexible button or
No line
The longest ringing line
(when multiple calls arrive)
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3
0
1
2
0
1
(PDN)
A PDN button
Ringing (Tone Call)
Directly—The party’s voice is heard without ringing.
Ring only—Prohibiting the caller switching to the voice mode.
No—The telephone will not ring.
Yes—The telephone will ring.
280 Operating Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Forced Answerback
Do you prefer to answer a call without going off-hook regardless of the AUTO ANS button status?
Live Call Screening Mode
Set
Which service do you prefer when a calling party is recording a message in your mailbox?
LCS Mode Set (After
Answering)
Would you like to keep recording after answering the call in the LCS mode?
Would you prefer to automatically hear a call waiting tone when you receive a call while already on the phone?
Programming
Input
2
2
2
3
3
5
6
0
Manual Call Waiting
How would you prefer to receive call waiting notifications for intercom calls?
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selection
Which type of call waiting tone do you prefer?
Absent Message
Would you like to show a message on the caller’s telephone display?
3
3
4
1
2
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Selection & Parameter
No—Disable
Yes—Enable
You can monitor the message through the telephone speaker. (Handsfree mode)
Only an alarm tone is heard. (Private mode)
No—Stop recording
Yes—Keep recording
No—Off
1 Yes—On
0
1
2
3
No call (Off)
Tone (BSS)
Voice announcement through the built-in speaker
(OHCA)
Voice announcement through the handset (Whisper
OHCA)
Tone 1 0
1 Tone 2
0 message no. (1–
8)
9
No—Off
Yes—Shows the selected message.
Yes—Shows your personal message.
Operating Manual 281
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Personal Absent Message
Creating your personal message
Programming
Input
4 1
Selection & Parameter message (max. 16 characters)
5 0 /
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)
To forward or refuse some or all of your incoming calls
(for both calls)
5 1
(for outside calls)
5 2
(for intercom calls)
5 3
0
1
2 + desired no.
(max. 32 digits)
3
+ desired no.
(max. 32 digits)
4
+ desired no.
(max. 32 digits)
5
+ desired no.
(max. 32 digits)
Off
Do Not Disturb (DND)
All—Forward all calls
Busy—Forwarded when your extension is busy.
No Answer—Forwarded when you do not answer.
Busy/No Answer—
Forwarded when you do not answer or when your extension is busy.
(0–120) seconds
(Default: 15 seconds)
FWD N/A Timer
To set the timer for "No
Answer" and "Busy/No
Answer"
Call Pickup Deny
Should you prohibit other people from picking up your calls?
Do you use the headset?
Executive Busy Override
Deny
Do you prohibit other people from joining your conversation?
Paging Deny
Would you like to prohibit paging announcements?
Key Pad Tone Set
Do you prefer to hear the key pad tone?
6 0
6 1
6 2
6 3
6 4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No—Allow
Yes—Deny
No—Headset off
Yes—Headset on
No—Allow
Yes—Deny
No—Allow
Yes—Deny
No—Off
Yes—On
282 Operating Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Background Music (BGM)
Do you want background music through your telephone speaker while onhook?
To register a Bluetooth wireless headset on your extension
To cancel the registration of a
Bluetooth wireless headset on your extension
Programming
Input
6
6
6
5
6
7
Extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
To set your extension PIN or change the stored extension
PIN
Extension Dial Lock
To prevent other people from using your telephone
Display Lock
To prevent other people from seeing your personal speed dialling directory, call log, and from playing back the voice messages in your message box
9
9
9
0
1
2
0
Selection & Parameter
1
+ BGM no.
(1 digit)
No—Off
Yes—On
Pass key (max. 16 digits)
Confirm that the ID of your Bluetooth wireless headset is displayed.
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE + same extension
PIN stored extension
PIN + new extension
PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE + same extension
PIN extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
0 extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
1 extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
0 extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
1
To set an extension PIN
To change the stored extension
PIN
To unlock
To lock
To unlock
To lock
Operating Manual 283
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Programming
Input
Selection & Parameter
One-touch Dialling
Assignment Mode
Selection
Do you prefer to set the Onetouch dialling only?
#
0
1
No—Normal (Any Flexible buttons can be modified.)
Yes—Only One-touch dialling buttons can be modified. However, to modify them, there is no need to enter
"2" before the number.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
Not available for a PS.
Only available for KX-T7633/KX-T7636/IP-PTs (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321)/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-DT543/KX-DT546 telephones.
Not available for the KX-T7665.
This setting applies to both outside and intercom calls. For intercom calls, this feature must be enabled through system programming.
Only available for certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for IP-PTs and certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephones.
Registering and cancelling a Bluetooth wireless headset may take time. Please avoid any interruption during that time by, for example, going off-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a.
Keeping your PIN secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your PIN regularly.
• After the programme number is entered, the programme title is displayed.
The programming screen can be changed with the Navigator Key (Up or Down).
• You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a number.
284 Operating Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling
PROG.
1 0
OR
PAUSE
OR personal speed dialling no.
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Enter 10 and then press ENTER .
Or press STORE .
Enter personal speed dialling number (2 digits).
phone no.
OR name
OR
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
PROG.
Press ENTER or STORE .
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Enter name*
(max. 20 characters).
•
* To enter characters, refer to " Entering Characters".
Press ENTER or STORE .
Operating Manual 285
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To edit the names and numbers of personal speed dialling
PROG.
1 0
OR
PAUSE
OR personal speed dialling no.
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Enter 10 and then press ENTER .
Or press STORE .
Enter personal speed dialling number (2 digits).
To erase a number or character
CLEAR
Press Left or Right to select a desired part.
Press " CLEAR ".
To insert a number or character
Press Left or Right to select a desired part.
number/character
Enter a number or character.
It will be inserted in front of the selected part.
OR
Press ENTER or STORE .
Clearing Features
You can clear or change to features as follows:
Features
Display Switching Mode
Hot Line
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Parallelled Telephone
Forced Answerback Selection
Live Call Screening Mode Set
LCS Mode Set (After Answering)
Automatic Call Waiting
286 Operating Manual
Default Setting
Automatic
Off
Allow
Caller ID assigned on your extension
Intercom
The longest ringing line
Ringing (Tone Call)
Paired SLT will ring
Disable
Hands-free mode
Stop recording
Off
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Features
Manual Call Waiting—Intercom Calls
Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
Absent Message
Personal Absent Message
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—Intercom/Outside
Calls
FWD N/A Timer
Call Pickup Deny
Headset Operation
Executive Busy Override Deny
Paging Deny
Key Pad Tone Set
Background Music (BGM)
Data Line Security
Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR]
Log-in/Log-out
Message Waiting
Timed Reminder
Default Setting
Off (No call/No tone)
Tone 1
Off
Cleared
Off
15 seconds
Allow
Headset off
Allow
Allow
On
Off
Off
Allow
Log-in
Off
Cleared
To change the above features back to their default settings
PROG.
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
OR OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Enter ## .
Press ENTER or STORE .
Press ENTER or STORE .
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
• If you do not desire that the Call Waiting, FWD/DND or Hot Line to be cleared by this feature, please ask your dealer.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
You can customise the flexible buttons and/or programmable feature (PF) buttons on PTs, Add-on Key
Modules, and PSs. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons.
Operating Manual 287
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
• To enter programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
• The buttons in the table below can only be set on certain flexible buttons, as follows:
– Flexible buttons on PTs/Add-on Key Modules/PSs: all buttons can be set.
– Flexible buttons on DSS Consoles: all buttons except CTI and Primary Directory Number
(PDN) buttons can be set.
– Programmable feature (PF) buttons: only the One-touch Dialling button can be set.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users and S-PS users: You cannot customise the flexible buttons with the following method from your phone. You can customise the flexible buttons
using Web Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Customising the Flexible Buttons".
To enter the programming mode
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
To programme
To continue programming input
OR
Press desired flexible button .
Follow programming input .
Press ENTER or STORE .
To exit
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Button
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Single-CO (S-CO)
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
One-touch Dialling *1
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Message
Message for Another
Extension
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both calls
FWD/DND—Outside calls
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Group FWD—Both calls
Programming Input
#
+ Outside line group no. (2 digits)
0
+ Outside line no. (3 digits)
1
+ Extension no.
*12
3
#
2 *2 + Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
0
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no. (+
+ delayed ringing time [0–7]) *3
4 0
4 0 + Extension no./Incoming call distribution group extension no.
4
4
1
4 3
4
2
4
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
288 Operating Manual
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Button
Group FWD—Outside calls
Group FWD—Intercom calls
Account
Conference
Terminate
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Call Charge Reference
Call Park
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Call Log *4
Call Log for ICD Group *4
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in/Log-out of a specified group
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
Hurry-up
Wrap-up
System Alarm *4
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Answer *4
Release *4
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
ISDN Service *6
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR)
4 5
Programming Input
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
4 6 + Incoming call distribution group extension no.
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5
5
2
3
+ Parking zone no. (2 digits)
5 3
5
5
5 5
4
4
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
5 5
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
5 5
5
5
5
6
7
8
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
5 9
+ 0/1/2/3 *5 (+
#
+ Tenant no.)
6 0
6 1
6 2
6 3
+ Toll Restriction/Call Barring Level (1–7)
+ Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
6 4
6 5
Operating Manual 289
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
ISDN-Hold
Button
Headset *4*7
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS) *8
CTI
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Check-in *4
Check-out *4
Cleaned-up *4
Two-way Record *10
Two-way Transfer *10
One-touch Two-way
Transfer *10
Live Call Screening
(LCS) *10
Voice Mail Transfer *10
Programming Input
6
6
6
7
6 8
(+ Tenant no.)
6 9
+ Another PBX extension no.
7 0
7 1
7) *9
7 2
8 0
8 1
+ Extension no. +
#
+ delayed ringing time (0–
8 2
9 0
+ UM group’s floating extension no.
floating extension no.
*11 /Voice mail
9 1
+ UM group’s floating extension no.
floating extension no.
*11 /Voice mail
9 1
+ UM group’s floating extension no.
*11 /Voice mail floating extension no. + # + Extension no./Incoming call distribution group extension no.
9 2
9 4 + UM group’s floating extension no.
*11 /Voice mail floating extension no.
290 Operating Manual
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
• *1 " ", "#", FLASH/RECALL, PAUSE, Secret (INTERCOM) and TRANSFER can also be stored.
If you do not want to display the stored number when making a call, press the Secret
(INTERCOM) button before and after the numbers you wish to conceal.
If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access number.
<Example>
49 1234 # 0/9
SECRET
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code feature no.
Account code Account code delimiter Automatic line access number
Phone number
• *2 For a PF button, "2" is not required to enter before the desired number.
• *3 Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter delayed ringing time (0: Immediate, 1: 1 ring, 2: 2 rings, 3: 3 rings, 4: 4 rings, 5: 5 rings, 6: 6 rings, 7: No ring). In this case, you can automatically join a new ICD Group by creating a button for that group.
• *4 This button is not available for a PS.
• *5 0: Day/Night/Lunch/Break, 1: Day/Night/Break, 2: Day/Night/Lunch, 3: Day/Night
• *6 Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Refer to "1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)".
• *7 This button is not available for the KX-T7665.
• *8 The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the settings of the PBX.
• *9 It is possible to set delayed ringing for each SDN button.
• *10 This button is used for the integrated voice mail features.
• *11 The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
• To exit at any time, lift the handset.
• For KX-NT366 and KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: After customising a flexible
button, you can set the displayed text for Self Labelling. To enter characters, refer to "
• *12 You can set a Unified Messaging port extension number or the Unified Messaging FAX server extension number as an extension number for the DSS button.
• You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a number.
Operating Manual 291
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
To specify the ringing tones for each CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button (DPT/IP-PT only)
To continue
PROG.
Press
PROGRAM .
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
INTERCOM
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
INTERCOM tone type no.
R.Tone
Press CO , ICD Group ,
PDN , SDN , or
INTERCOM .
Press CO , ICD Group ,
PDN , SDN , or
INTERCOM .
Enter tone type number .
*
OR
PROG.
Press ENTER or
STORE .
Press
PROGRAM .
• * Available tone types vary depending on the telephone you are using:
– KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT500 series/KX-DT300 series (except
KX-DT321)/KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665): Tone types "01" to
"30" (01–20: tone, 21–30: melody) are available.
– KX-NT265/KX-NT321/KX-DT321/KX-T7665: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"01".
– Other telephones: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"02".
• Only one ringing tone can be selected for all PDN buttons on your extension.
To clear the button
To continue
PROG.
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
2
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Press desired flexible button .
Enter 2 .
Press ENTER or
STORE .
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
292 Operating Manual
3.2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console
3.2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance
Console
3.2.1 User Programming
You can edit your personal information as well as limited extension and mailbox settings using Web
Maintenance Console. (You can view menus and setting items, but you can edit only a limited number of items.)
In addition, you can download the KX-NS1000 FAX Driver and the UM IMAP Session Controller for
Microsoft Outlook. For details, refer to "
Sending a Fax from your PC" and "
–
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
–
–
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
–
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
–
–
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
• The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
This step is required only when accessing Web Maintenance Console for the first time.
• For the IP address of the PBX, login name, and password, ask your System Administrator.
• If the configuration of the Web browser or PC changes, the certificate may need to be installed again. Once a certificate has been installed, Web Maintenance Console will be displayed after step
.
1.
Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance
Console port number into the address bar, and then press Enter .
2.
If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using TLS, a security alert window is displayed. Follow the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console, the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered.
Operating Manual 293
3.2.1 User Programming
• If you attempt to log in, but enter an incorrect password three times, you may not attempt to log in again for a 5 minute period.
CAUTION
• For security, change the password the first time that you programme the PBX.
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Edit User Screen
The Edit User screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
On this screen, you can edit various user settings.
To finish editing, click OK .
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
Changing Your User Name and Displayed Language
You can change your account’s first name, last name, and displayed language in the User Information tab of the Edit User screen. The information entered in First Name and Last Name are displayed on your telephone.
1.
In the User Information tab, edit your First Name
(max. 20 characters) and Last Name (max. 20 characters), and select the displayed language from the Change Language drop-down list.
2.
Click OK .
294 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Changing Your Contact Information
You can change your extension PIN and contact information (home number, mobile number, fax number, and e-mail address) in the Contact tab of the Edit User screen. E-mail address(es) specified in Email 1–3 in the Contact tab are used for e-mail notifications of missed outside calls.
1.
In the Contact tab, edit Extension PIN (max. 10 digits), Fax , Phone (Home) , Phone (Mobile) , and
Email 1–3 .
Note
Click Edit to edit the extension PIN.
Entry for the extension PIN is hidden and displayed as dots " · ".
2.
Click OK .
Changing Your Mailbox Password
You can change your mailbox password in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Edit for Mailbox
Password .
To change your message client password, click Edit for Mailbox Password (Message Client) .
2.
Enter a password in Enter new password , and then re-enter it in Confirm new password .
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as dots " · ".
3.
Click OK .
Registering a Prompt to the Mailbox
You can display, play, record or delete the following prompts:
•
Mailbox Owner Name (refer to " Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name")
•
Personal Greetings (refer to " Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages")
–
No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After Hours Greeting, Caller ID Greeting *1
, Temporary
Greeting and Absent Message
•
Interview Mailbox Questions *2
(refer to " Interview Mailbox")
•
Personal Caller ID Name *1 (refer to "
Personal Caller Name Announcement")
•
Personal Distribution List Voice Label *2
(refer to " Personal Group Distribution Lists")
*1
*2
This feature may be disabled depending on your COS settings.
This feature may be disabled depending on your system programming settings or mailbox settings.
Operating Manual 295
3.2.1 User Programming
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Prompt
Registration .
2 .
In the Prompt Registration box, select a tab for the desired type of prompt.
To record a prompt
Select a Prompt No.
, and click Play/Record .
When "Record from extension" is selected: a.
Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect .
b.
When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
c.
Click Record , Stop , or Play to record or play a system prompt.
d.
Click Disconnect .
When "Import from recorded file" is selected: a.
Click Browse . The Open dialogue box appears.
b.
Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
c.
Select the desired WAV file.
d.
Click Open to import the file.
e.
Click OK .
To start and stop prompt playback a.
Select the desired prompt.
b.
Click Play/Record .
c.
Click Play or Stop .
To delete a specific prompt a.
Select the desired prompt.
b.
Click Delete .
c.
Click OK .
Customising your mailbox setting
You can change your mailbox setting in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Advanced setting .
296 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
2.
The Mailbox Settings box appears.
The following items are editable.
Mailbox Parameters
Item
Mailbox Password
Description
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. If a default password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1.
Click Edit .
2.
In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters in length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3.
Click OK
Mailbox Password (Message
Client)
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software program. If a default password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1.
Click Edit .
2.
In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters in length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3.
Click OK .
Covering Extension
Interview Mailbox
Enter a desired extension number you want to assign for transferring to your Covering Extension in the box (1–8 digits).
Enter an interview mailbox number you want to assign for your mailbox in the box (2–8 digits [the maximum number of digits may be less than
8, depending on system programming]).
All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Select Yes or No .
If Yes is selected, calls are automatically forwarded to your mailbox.
Operating Manual 297
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Call Transfer Sequence
(Selection), Call Transfer
Sequence (Other)
No Answer Time (Selection),
No Answer Time (Other)
Call Transfer Status
Description
Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Allows each mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence (Personal
Transfer Sequence).
1.
Select System or Other .
2.
If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
• D : Disconnecting
• F : Flash (Recall)
• R : Ringback Tone Detection
• T : Dial Tone Detection
• , : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• X : Extension Dialling
• 0–9, , # : Dial Code
Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before handling unanswered calls to the extension.
1.
Select System or Other .
2.
If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s.
Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches your extension.
1.
Click Edit .
2.
Select the setting from the following items.
• None : Rings your extension.
• Call blocking : Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension will not ring.
• Call screening : The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Intercom Paging : Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to Mailbox : Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
• Transfer to specified telephone number 1–5 : Transfers the caller to one of the specified telephone numbers in numerical order of priority.
3.
Click OK to finish.
298 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Incomplete Call Handling for
No Answer
Incomplete Call Handling for
Busy
Call Transfer Anytime in
Incomplete Handling Menu
Description
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is no answer.
1.
Click Edit .
2.
Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message : Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension : Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging : Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator : Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu : Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
3.
Click OK to finish.
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy.
1.
Click Edit .
2.
Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message : Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension : Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging : Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator : Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu : Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
3.
Click OK to finish.
Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call while the Automated Attendant service is playing an
Incomplete Call Handling menu.
Advanced Call Transfer Setting
Item
Advanced Call Transfer
Setting
Description
By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call
Handling, you can create call handling "scenarios" for your extension.
Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each absent message in Scenario Setting .
Operating Manual 299
3.2.1 User Programming
Item Description
1.
Click Edit for creating scenarios.
2.
Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down list.
3.
Type the scenario name in the Scenario Name box.
4.
Assign the following options in each section. Click OK when finished.
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the selected scenario.
Selection
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the selected scenario.
Select the setting from the following items.
• None : Rings your extension.
• Call blocking : Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension will not ring.
• Call screening : The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Leave a Message : Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Intercom Paging : Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
VIP Filter
If "Leave a Message" is selected for Selection and "Enable" is selected for this setting, calls from certain phone numbers will be transferred directly to your extension or specified telephone number.
• Telephone Number 1, 2, 3 : Specifies the telephone numbers that the VIP Filter setting will be applied to. When a call is received from any of the numbers specified here, the call will be transferred immediately to the destination specified in Transfer to (Selection) .
• Transfer to (Selection) : Specifies the transfer destination for calls transferred according to the VIP Filter setting.
– Extension : The call is transferred to your extension.
– Other : The call is transferred to the telephone number that is specified in Transfer to (Other) .
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu
Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is selected for Selection .
300 Operating Manual
Item
3.2.1 User Programming
Description
Transfer to specified telephone number - 1
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection , specifying a telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number.
Enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0–9, , and #.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other)
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection , and the call could not be transferred to the number specified in Transfer to specified telephone number- 1 , the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
1.
Select Other , Extension , or Covering Extension .
2.
If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0–9, , and #.
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message : Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension : Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging : Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator : Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu : Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
Operating Manual 301
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Scenario Setting
Description
Incomplete Call Handling for Busy
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message : Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension : Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging : Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator : Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu : Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
You can select scenarios set in Advanced Call Transfer Setting .
A scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message setting of your extension.
• Current Scenario : The scenario that is assigned to the absent message currently set at your extension is displayed here.
• Temporary Scenario : Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely. A scenario set here will be used regardless of your extension status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
• Absent Message 1–9 : The selected scenario will be used when the corresponding Absent Message is set at your extension.
Notification Parameters
Item
Message Waiting Lamp
Telephone Device—Device
No. 1, 2, 3
Description
If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of your telephone turns on when a new message is recorded.
Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device.
The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3.
Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for
Unreceived Message to "Yes", and set program the settings, then click
OK to finish.
Notification Type
Specifies the type of message for which notification is sent. Notification can be sent for all messages, or voice messages or fax messages only.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent.
302 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Telephone Device—Device
Notification Timer—Device
Start Delay Time (0-120 min)
Description
Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. You can also specify the number to be dialled by entering it from your telephone, allowing you to set this feature on a case by case basis.
Enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
• , : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• T : Dial Tone Detection
• X : Callback Number Entry Code
• 0–9, , # : Dial Code
Note
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
No. of Retries
Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer.
Busy Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device is busy.
No Answer Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device does not answer.
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification. You can also specify the use mode from your telephone:
• Not use : The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously : The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled : The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Time Frame : If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify the time frame:
1.
Click a day ( Sunday – Saturday ) tab.
2.
Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2 .
3.
Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click
OK .
Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received before sending message waiting notification.
Operating Manual 303
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Telephone Device—Device
Notification Timer—Device
Interval Time between
Device 1, 2, 3 and Next
Device
E-mail/Text Message Device
—Device No. 1, 2, 3
Description
Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting
Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
You can be notified by e-mail when a new message is recorded in your mailbox.
Click Edit for the extension to schedule, program the settings, and click
OK to finish.
Note
You can be notified by e-mail when an outside call is missed. For
details, refer to "Changing Your Contact Information" in "3.2.1 User
User Name
Specifies the name of the user of the device.
E-mail Address
Specifies the e-mail address of the device.
Notification Type
Specifies the type of Message Waiting Notification to be sent.
Notification can be sent for all messages, or voice messages or fax messages only.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent messages.
Title Order
Specifies the format of the title of the notification.
Title String
Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification.
Callback Number
Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification (max. 32 digits).
Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the Message Waiting Notification.
Attach Voice File
Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e-mail.
Attach Fax File
Specifies whether to attach a fax image file of fax messages to the notification e-mail.
304 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item Description
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification:
• Not use : The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously : The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled : The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Time Frame : If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify the time frame:
1.
Click a day ( Sunday – Saturday ) tab.
2.
Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2 .
3.
Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4.
To specify if sent voice message or fax image files are deleted from the Unified Message system after they are sent by e-mail, select
"Yes" for Delete After Send (Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax
File) .
5.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click
OK .
External Message Delivery
Item
External Message Delivery
Active
External Message Delivery
Prompt Mode
Description
If set to "Yes", you are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature.
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by the system in the specified language.
If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to
"Selective", the receiver has a choice of prompts.
Auto Forwarding
Item
Auto Forwarding Active
Auto Forwarding Mailbox
Number
Description
If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another mailbox.
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded.
Note
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination.
Operating Manual 305
3.2.1 User Programming
Item Description
Auto Forwarding Delay Time Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before forwarding unplayed messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Auto Forwarding Message
Type
Auto Forwarding Message
Type Urgent
Auto Forwarding Mode
Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention
Time, or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded.
Specifies whether all messages, or only voice messages or only fax messages are forwarded.
Specifies whether only urgent messages are forwarded.
Auto Forwarding Mode -
Message Remains New
Auto Forwarding Expires
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.
Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new.
This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to
"Copy".
Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will expire.
306 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Personal Custom Service
Item
Personal Custom Service
Description
Specifies the Personal Custom Service.
Note
• Make sure to add an outside line access number when you store an outside telephone number.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
1.
Click Edit .
2.
For each Key , specify an Assigned Operation .
3.
For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value from the following.
• Transfer to specified mailbox : Allow the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension : Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service : Allows the caller to access
Voice Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service : Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu : Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.
• Transfer to operator : Connects the caller to an operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number) : Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number. Enter the outside numbers list index (1–4).
• Page the party : Pages you.
• Repeat greeting : Repeats the greeting.
• None : No operation assigned.
4.
Click OK when finished.
Operating Manual 307
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Outside Numbers
No DTMF Input Operation
Description
Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the
"Transfer to outside (specified number)" operation in the Personal
Custom Service settings.
1.
Click Edit .
2.
Enter Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, ,
#, and special codes:
• T : Dial Tone Detection
• , : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• 0–9, , # : Dial Code
3.
Click OK when finished.
Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial anything) is received after the Personal Greeting:
• Recording : The caller will be guided to leave a message.
• Disconnect (All Day) : The line will be disconnected, regardless of the time of day.
• Disconnect (Only After Hours) : The line will be disconnected only after hours.
Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in No DTMF Input Operation is performed (0–10 s).
No DTMF Input Operation
Wait Time
Personal Distribution List
Item
List 1–4 Members
Description
Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation. A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Follow the steps below to edit list members.
1.
Click Edit for a Personal Distribution List (1–4) Members item.
2.
Under Subscribers To Add , click the checkbox in No.
for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3.
Click Add .
4.
Click OK .
Follow the steps below to remove members from a list.
1.
Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
2.
Under Distribution , click the checkbox in No.
for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3.
Click Delete .
4.
Click OK .
308 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Remote Call
Item
Remote Call Telephone
Number 1, 2 [0–9, *]
Automatic Login item
Auto Login Extension
Auto Login Extension
Password Entry
Requirement
Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
Auto Login Caller ID
Password Entry
Requirement
Description
Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are forwarded when you set Remote Call Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers can be specified per mailbox.
Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an outside line).
Note
This feature may be disabled by system programming for your mailbox.
Description
When this item is set to "Enable", you are able to access your mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number. You can automatically log in from your extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk. When logging in from outside telephones, the Toll Saver feature is also available.
Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to that mailbox.
Specifies the telephone number from which you can automatically be logged in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one of these numbers, the caller (you) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this telephone number must be unique for each mailbox.
Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller
ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 .
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto
Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 .
Operating Manual 309
3.2.1 User Programming item
Auto Login Toll Saver
Description
Allows you to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not new messages have been recorded in your mailbox by the number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your calls. Toll Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic
Login; you can use Toll Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk:
• Disable : Disables the Toll Saver feature.
• DID : Toll Saver functions when the system receives the preprogrammed DID number from the PBX.
• Caller ID : Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that matches one of the preprogrammed numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
• Trunk : Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the preprogrammed trunk.
Direct Service
Item Description
Direct Service UM Extension Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified
Messaging extension number:
• Record No Answer Greeting : You can record the greeting played when there is no answer.
• Record Busy Greeting : You can record the greeting played when their extension is busy.
• Record After Hours Greeting : You can record the greeting played when the system is in night mode.
• Record Temporary Greeting : You can record a greeting that is used exclusively until you disable it.
• Change Day Main Menu : Change the Day Main Menu greeting. Only the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Night Main Menu : Change the Night Main Menu greeting.
Only the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Emergency Greeting : Change the Emergency Greeting.
Only the Message Manager may make this change.
Note
Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this Direct
Service Access.
Fax Options
Item
Automatic Delivery Status
Description
Specifies whether Automatic Delivery is used to automatically forward received faxes to a specified fax machine.
310 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Automatic Delivery Status
Default Fax Number [0-9 * #
T , ; ]
Automatic Delivery Status
Printed Fax Message
Play Voice/Fax Selection
Menu
Fax Number Confirmation
No Space for Receiving
Coverage Mode
Cover Page Language
Description
Specifies the default number for which to send automatically delivered faxes.
Enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
• , : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• T : Dial Tone Detection
• X : Callback Number Entry Code
• 0–9, , # : Dial Code
Note
To clear the default fax number, deleted the number from this box.
Specifies if automatically forwarded faxes are marked as "old" or "new", or deleted.
Specifies if you will be prompted to choose which messages will be played: either voice messages, information about waiting fax messages, or all messages.
Specifies if a dialled fax number must be re-entered for confirmation before sending.
Specifies the action taken when there is not enough free space in the mailbox to save a fax message in the mailbox:
• Transfer to Fax Extension : Transfers the fax to a specified fax extension.
• Receive in GDM : The fax is redirected to the general delivery mailbox.
• No Receiving : The fax message is not received and the system goes on hook.
Note
If no fax extension is specified but Transfer to Fax Extension is selected, the system will go on hook.
Specifies the language used for the set information generated for fax cover pages.
Announce Number of Messages
Item
Subscriber Service - All New
Messages
Description
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - All
Messages
Subscriber Service - New
Voice Messages
Subscriber Service - New
Fax Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of all messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new fax messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Operating Manual 311
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Subscriber Service - New
Urgent Messages
Receiving Message Service
- All New Messages
Receiving Message Service
- All Messages
Receiving Message Service
- New Voice Messages
Receiving Message Service
- New Fax Messages
Receiving Message Service
- New Urgent Messages
Description
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages marked as urgent in your mailbox when you log in.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number all messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new fax messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new urgent messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Message Client
Item
Message Client Display
Language
Description
Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client.
Changing Forward/Do Not Disturb Setting
You can change your extension’s Forward/Do Not Disturb settings for outside and intercom calls in the
Telephony Feature tab of the Edit User screen.
312 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, set Forward/Do Not
Disturb as follows:
• For Outside Calls :
To specify the forward type, select the desired type from the For external calls drop-down list, then enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)
or
to specify the forward destination.
• For Intercom Calls :
To specify the forward type, select the desired type from the For internal calls drop-down list, then enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)
or
to specify the forward destination.
*1
These phone numbers are set in the Contact tab of the
Edit User screen.
Note
To apply settings to both outside and intercom calls, click For both internal calls and external calls .
When you select this, the setting of For external calls is applied to both outside and intercom calls.
2.
Click OK .
Storing names and numbers in personal speed dialling
You can set frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100
Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed at your extension for your personal use.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Speed Dialling
View/Edit .
2.
The available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the desired set from Index .
3.
Enter the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call in Speed Dialling - Personal Name (max. 20 characters).
4.
Enter the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed
Dialling number in Speed Dialling - Personal Number
(max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, T [Transfer], [ ]
[Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
5.
Click OK .
Customising the Flexible Buttons
You can customise the flexible buttons on PTs, Add-on Key Modules, PSs, KX-UT133/KX-UT136/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phones, and S-PSs. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Flexible Button
View/Edit .
Operating Manual 313
3.2.1 User Programming
2.
To set the flexible buttons, specify each button on the
Flexible Button screen.
Follow the table below to set each parameter. When you finish, click OK .
Button
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Single-CO (S-CO)
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
One-touch Dialling
Steps
Select Loop CO from Type .
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) .
Select Group CO from Type .
Then specify the outside line group number in Parameter Selection .
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) .
Select Single CO from Type .
Then specify the outside line number in Parameter Selection .
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) .
Select DSS from Type .
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number .
Select One-touch from Type .
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
Note
• If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access number.
<Example>
49 1234 # 0/9
Account code feature no.
Account code
Account code delimiter
Automatic line access number
SECRET
[ 123 4567 ]
Phone number
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Message
• For KX-UT series SIP phones and S-PS users:
Use only 0–9, , and # for One-touch Dialling buttons. If characters other than these are stored, they will be considered invalid. Only the digits up to an invalid character will be sent when using that One-touch Dialling button.
Select ICD Group from Type .
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) .
Select Message Waiting from Type .
314 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Message for Another
Extension
Call Park
Button
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Call Log
Call Log for ICD Group
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in/Log-out of a specified group
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
Hurry-up
Steps
Select Message Waiting from Type .
Then enter the extension number or incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number .
Select FWD/DND (Both) from Type .
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not
Disturb (DND)—Both calls
FWD/DND—Outside calls
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Group FWD—Both calls
Group FWD—Outside calls
Group FWD—Intercom calls
Account
Conference
Terminate
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Call Charge Reference
Select FWD/DND (External) from Type .
Select FWD/DND (Internal) from Type .
Select Group Fwd (Both) from Type .
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
Select Group Fwd (External) from Type .
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
Select Group Fwd (Internal) from Type .
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
Select Account from Type .
Select Conference from Type .
Select Terminate from Type .
Select EFA from Type .
Select Charge from Type .
Select Call Park from Type .
Then select Specific from Parameter Selection .
Specify the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) .
Select Call Park from Type .
Then select Automatic from Parameter Selection .
Select Call Log from Type .
Select Call Log from Type .
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type .
Then select None from Parameter Selection .
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type .
Then select Incoming Group from Parameter Selection .
And, enter the Incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type .
Then select All from Parameter Selection .
Select Hurry-up from Type .
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number .
Operating Manual 315
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Wrap-up
System Alarm
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Answer
Release
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
ISDN Service
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
ISDN-Hold
Headset
Time Service Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual)
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
CTI
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Select Wrap-up from Type .
Select System Alarm from Type .
Steps
Select Time Service from Type .
Then in Parameter Selection , select which time modes will be switched manually.
In Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) , select the Time
Table (tenant number) to be used for changing time modes in Automatic
Switching mode.
Select Answer from Type .
Select Release from Type .
Select TRS Level Change from Type .
Then select the Toll Restriction/Call Barring Level (1–7) from Parameter
Selection .
Select ISDN Service from Type .
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
Note
Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Refer to "1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service
Select CLIR from Type .
Select COLR from Type .
Select ISDN Hold from Type .
Select Headset from Type .
Select Time Service - Automatic/Manual from Type .
Then in Parameter Selection , select the Time Table (tenant number) to be used when Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Select NDSS from Type .
Then enter the another PBX extension number in Dial (max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9).
Note
The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the settings of the PBX.
Select CTI from Type .
Select PDN from Type .
316 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
Check-in
Check-out
Cleaned-up
Two-way Record
Two-way Transfer
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Voice Mail Transfer
DN
Button Steps
Select SDN from Type .
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number .
In Parameter Selection , specify the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) .
Select Check In from Type .
Select Check Out from Type .
Select Cleaned Up from Type .
Select Two-way Record from Type .
Then enter the UM group’s floating extension number in Extension
Number . (The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
Select Two-way Transfer from Type .
Then enter the UM group’s floating extension number in Extension
Number . (The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
Specify the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer in Ext No. of
Mailbox . (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Select Two-way Transfer from Type .
Then enter the UM group’s floating extension number in Extension
Number . (The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
Enter extension number or incoming call distribution group extension number to Ext No. of Mailbox .
Select LCS from Type .
Select Voice Mail Transfer from Type .
Then enter the UM group’s floating extension number in Extension
Number . (The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
Select DN from Type .
*1
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
• Rows whose Key Location field is colored can be customized.
• The number of available flexible buttons is displayed in Available Keys on the screen.
• This feature is available only for DPTs and IP-PTs.
• For KX-NT366 and KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: You can set the text displayed for each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on the Flexible
Button screen.
• For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users: You can set the text displayed (a maximum of 10 characters) for each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on the Flexible Button screen.
Changing Your Password
You can change your password for the Web Maintenance Console in the Login Account tab of the Edit
User screen.
Operating Manual 317
3.2.1 User Programming
1.
In the Login Account tab, Password (4–16 characters in length) can be edited.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as dots " · ".
2.
Click OK .
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
If you are designated as a supervisor for Automatic Two-way Recording, you can set the recording for extensions you are supervising and listen to the recorded conversations as messages through Web
Maintenance Console. Calls to and from specified extensions can be automatically recorded to a mailbox.
For each targeted extension, the following types of calls can be recorded:
• Intercom (internal) calls
• Outside (external) calls
• Incoming ICD group calls only (i.e., when recording outside calls, limit recording to incoming ICD group calls only)
You can receive an e-mail notification when Automatic Two-way Recording is used. The recorded conversation can also be sent as an attachment to the e-mail. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
• This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors.
• Forwarded calls and calls retrieved from being on hold will also be automatically recorded.
However, conference calls will not be recorded.
• Recording will automatically stop when the mailbox reaches its capacity. Delete older messages in order to use this feature again.
• If the enabled extension has a Two-way Record button assigned to it, the button will flash during recording. However, that button cannot be used to cancel this feature.
• An extension whose conversation is being recorded cannot be the target of the following features:
– Executive Busy Override
– Whisper OHCA
Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded.
Editing Recording Settings
On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed. You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1.
On the left side of the screen, click Users → Automatic Two-way Recording → Edit a Recording .
2.
For an extension, click the setting for Internal call , External Call , or ICDG Incoming Only .
• Internal call : Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call : Calls with outside parties are recorded.
318 Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
• ICDG Incoming Only : Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call distribution group are recorded.
Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3.
Select On or Off for that setting.
4.
Click OK when finished.
Viewing and Playing Messages
Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1.
On the left side of the screen, click Users → Automatic Two-way Recording → Record List .
2.
Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No.
drop-down list.
3.
Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
4.
Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK .
5.
Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages displayed or play a message.
• To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that match those conditions.
– Mailbox : Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL .
– Extension : Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL .
– Status : Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
– Internal/External : Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or external calls, or specify both.
– Call Type : Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or specify both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or
"Both".
– Phone Number : Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
– Caller Name : Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available for all recorded messages).
– Length : Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
– Period : Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
• To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1.
Select the check box of a message to play.
2.
At the bottom of the screen, select PC .
3.
Click the (play) button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to Web Maintenance Console.
Operating Manual 319
3.2.1 User Programming
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1.
In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click
Search .
2.
Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3.
At the bottom of the screen, select Phone .
4.
Click the (play) button.
Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the (play) button will be disabled. Select a specific mailbox to enable the (play) button.
5.
In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at which to play back the messages, and then click Connect .
6.
Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7.
During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step a , you can click
Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected messages.
8.
When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.
Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the (logout) button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the
PBX to the Storage Memory Card.
1.
Click the (logout) button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2.
Click Yes .
• If the computer running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down, or the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Always end your programming session by clicking the (logout) button. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
320 Operating Manual
Section 4
Customising Extensions and the System–for
Managers
This section shows managers how to customise the
PBX’s extension and system settings according to their needs. Find the desired setting and program as necessary.
Operating Manual 321
4.1 Manager Programming
4.1 Manager Programming
4.1.1 Programming Information
The manager can programme the following items.
• Call Charges
• Other Extensions Control
Available Extension
The extension assigned as a manager
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display (2 lines or more)
(e.g., KX-NT343, KX-NT546, KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
Manager Password
To enter programming mode, the manager password (max. 10 digits) is required. (Default: 1234)
CAUTION
• The PBX has a default password preset. For security, change the password the first time that you programme the PBX.
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in the
password, refer to " Entering Characters".
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Conditions
The programming extension must be idle, on-hook and holding no calls.
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Changing Call Charges and Extension Control
To enter the programming mode
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
1 manager password
To programme
To continue programming input
To exit
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Enter 1 .
Enter manager password .
Follow programming input .
Press
HOLD .
Press PROGRAM or PAUSE .
Item
Changing the manager password.
0 0
Programming Input
+ + Password (max. 10 digits) +
322 Operating Manual
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Item
Viewing extension call charges.
Clearing extension call charges.
Setting the budget for extension call charges.
Viewing call charges for each verification code.
Clearing call charges for each verification code.
Setting the budget for each verification code.
Viewing call charges for each outside line.
Assigning a charge rate for each outside line group.
0 1
Programming Input
+ + Extension no.
0 1
+ + Extension no. + +
0
0
0
2
3
3
+ + Extension no. + Charge* +
+ + Verification code
+ + Verification code + +
0 4
+ + Verification code + Charge* +
0 5
+ + Outside line no. (3 digits)
0 6 + + Outside line group no. (2 digits) +
Charge rate* +
Clearing all charges.
Printing the total call charge.
Locking/unlocking other extensions.
(Remote Extension Dial Lock)
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for extensions.
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for verification codes.
0
0
7
+ +
8
+ +
9
0
0
+
(to unlock) +
+ Extension no. +
1
(to lock)/
9 1
+ + Extension no. +
Setting the verification code PIN.
9 2
+ + Verification code +
9 digits) +
3
+ + Verification code + PIN (max. 10
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your password (verification code PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a.
Keeping your PIN secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your PIN regularly.
• * To enter a decimal point, press .
Operating Manual 323
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
–
–
• Note:
The Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control feature cannot be used at the same time as
Hospitality features. (Refer to "1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment
(Hospitality Features)".) For details, consult your system administrator.
By specifying an ACD Supervisor for extension users, the ACD Supervisor can check and analyse the operating conditions of an ICD group. This is done by monitoring the current condition of the ICD group, and by collecting and analysing statistical ACD report information.
ICD group monitoring enables recording of ACD report data and allows various analyses based on that data. To analyse the ACD report, there are three filters: " Group ", " Agent ", and " Call ". The filtered ACD report data can be printed out and exported in CSV format. You can also create graphs (pie charts or bar charts) to easily analyse ACD reports. The flow from ACD report data collection to analysis is shown below:
324 Operating Manual
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Start ACD logging* 1
ICDG-A ICDG-B
Start Monitor
Start Monitor
Start ACD logging* 1
Real-time ICDG information
Real-time ICDG information
ACD supervisor
[Group Monitor Example]
Standard Mode
View ACD report
ACD report
Desired Filter set
Export (CSV only)
Graph
[Graph Example]
*1
Recording ACD report data is enabled at the same time the Group monitor starts.
Monitor Control & Execute
A user designated as an ACD Supervisor or Administrator can specify certain ICD groups to monitor and configure the monitoring settings. Finally, the user can start the monitor.
To configure the monitor settings and start monitoring
You can configure the monitor control settings in the Group Monitor of the ICDG Management in Web
Maintenance Console.
1.
On the left side of the screen, click Users → ICDG Management → Group Monitor .
2.
Select an ACD Supervisor from the Supervisor selection drop-down list.
3.
On the Layout of the Basic Settings , select the layout for showing the monitor results.
4.
Select the ICD Group that you want to monitor from the Select ICD Group drop-down list.
5.
On the Options , you can change the following settings for the monitor screen:
Operating Manual 325
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Item
Member Status View Mode
Highlighted
Display
Settings
Number of Current
Waiting Calls (1-30)
Waiting Time (0-10 min/10 sec)
Colour Mode
Blinking
Description
Select the display mode for members’ status.
Specify the number of waiting calls at which the
Current Waiting
Calls display is highlighted.
Specify the waiting time at which the Longest Waiting
Time display is highlighted.
Select the colour to use to highlight items on the screen.
Select whether items that are highlighted on the screen blink.
Value
Standard , Simple
1–30
0–10 minutes
Mode 1 , Mode 2 , Mode 3
Enable , Disable
6.
Click Apply .
7.
When you finish configuring the settings, click Start Monitor to start monitoring the selected ICD group.
8.
Click Close .
9.
Click OK .
ACD Report Analysis
You can specify which items to include in the monitor result report, the style in which to display the report profile, and the output format.
1.
On the left side of the screen, click Users → ICDG Management → ACD Report .
2.
Select an ACD Supervisor from the Supervisor selection drop-down list.
• To load an ACD report a.
Click Report Profiles .
b.
Select the Profile Name .
c.
Click Load .
• To save an ACD report a.
Click Report Profiles .
b.
Name the Profile Name (max. 32 characters).
c.
Click Save .
• To select ACD report options a.
Click Option .
b.
In ACD Report - Export CSV File Format , select either Comma(,) or Semicolon(;) as the data separator.
c.
Click OK .
You can make an ACD report through 3 types of filters: Group , Agent , and Call . On the ICD screen, select the target tab, configure the settings as necessary and then click Apply .
326 Operating Manual
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
For Group
1.
On the Group tab under Filter Settings , select one of the following items in the View Mode drop-down list:
Group , Hour , Day , Date , Month , Trunk , Caller ID/CLIP
Note
If you select Hour , specify the time range (0:00–23:59) in Range .
2.
On the Group—Filter Settings—Select Group screen, set the groups to analyse as follows: a.
Click Select .
b.
Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the
Available Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups displayed) c.
Click ==> to move the ICD group you selected in step b. to the Selected Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups)
To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click the ICD group name, and then click <== .
d.
Click OK .
3.
Select the target time period for the ACD report on Group—Filter Settings—Select Period .
4.
To show the report on a group basis, perform the following steps: a.
Click View Report .
The ACD Report - Group Report screen is displayed.
The filtered data is shown as follows:
Operating Manual 327
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Group Incoming Calls Total The number of incoming calls received by the target ICD group.
Answered The number of incoming calls answered by the target ICD group.
Lost The number of incoming calls to the target ICD group cancelled by the caller.
Talk Time
Wait Time
(Answered)
Max. Waiting Calls
Overflow The number of overflowed incoming calls from the target ICD group.
Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
Average
Max.
The average talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
The longest talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
Total
Average
Max.
The total waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
The average waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
The longest waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
Wait Time (Lost) Total
Average
Max.
The total waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
The average waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
The longest waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)
The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group.
When View Mode is " Group ", a pie graph will be created.
When View Mode is " Caller ID/CLIP ", a graph report cannot be created.
In other modes, a bar graph will be created.
b.
The results report can be output in one of the following 3 ways:
• Graph : Click Graph , open the ACD Report - Group Graph screen, and display the graph of the report. Click Print to print the graph.
• Export : Click Export , and save the report file.
• Print : Click Print to print the report.
c.
Click Close .
For Agent
1.
On the Agent tab under Filter Settings , select one of the following items in the View Mode drop-down list:
Agent , Hour , Day , Date , Month
328 Operating Manual
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Note
If you select Hour , specify the time range (0:00–23:59) in Range .
2.
On the Agent—Filter Settings—Select Agent screen, set the groups to analyse as follows: a.
Click Select .
b.
Click the agent name you want to analyse from the displayed agent names on Available Agent for
ACD Report window.
c.
Click ==> to move the agent you selected in step b. to the Selected Agent for ACD Report window.
(Maximum 128 agents)
To delete an agent from the Selected Agent for ACD Report window, click the agent name, and then click <== .
d.
Click OK .
3.
Select the target time period for the ACD report on Agent—Filter Settings—Select Period .
4.
To show the report on an agent basis, perform the following steps: a.
Click View Report .
The ACD Report - Agent Report screen is displayed.
The filtered data is shown as follows:
Agent Total Answer
Talk Time Total
Average
The number of calls that the target agent answers.
The total talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
The average talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Login Time
Not-ready Time
Wrap-upTime
Max.
The longest talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
The total login time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
The total not-ready time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
The total wrap-up time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS) b.
The results report can be output in one of the following 3 ways:
• Graph : Click Graph , open the ACD Report - Agent Graph screen, and display the graph of the report. Click Print to print the graph.
• Export : Click Export , and save the report file.
• Print : Click Print to print the report.
c.
Click Close .
For Call
1.
On the Call—Filter Settings—Select Group screen, set the group to analyse as follows: a.
Click Select .
b.
Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the
Available Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups displayed)
Operating Manual 329
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control c.
Click ==> to move the ICD group you selected in step b. to the Selected Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups)
To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click the ICD group name, and then click <== .
d.
Click OK .
2.
Select the target time period for the ACD report on Call—Filter Settings—Select Period .
3.
Select the target for an ACD report from the following, and then configure the filter settings on the Call—
Call Filter Mode screen.
• Caller ID/CLIP Filter : You can filter by Caller ID or CLIP.
a.
Click Caller ID/CLIP Filter .
b.
Enter the caller ID or CLIP as the target to analyse (maximum 10).
• Talk/Wait Duration Filter : You can filter by continuous talk time or wait time.
a.
Click Talk/Wait Duration Filter .
b.
Select Talk Time or Wait Time from the Mode drop-down list.
c.
Set the target time range to filter.
To set the minimum time duration, click Min.
, and set the time (0:00–23:59).
To set the maximum time duration, click Max.
, and set the time (0:00–23:59).
• Lost Call Filter : You can filter by lost calls.
a.
Click Lost Call Filter .
4.
To show the report on a group basis, perform the following steps: a.
Click View Report .
The ACD Report - Call Report screen is displayed.
The filtered data is shown as follows:
330 Operating Manual
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Call ACD Report
- Call Report
Start Date
Start Time
End Date
End Time
Result
ICDG
Incoming
Agent
Answering
Agent
Talk Time
Wait Time
Trunk
Caller ID/
CLIP
The start date of the call.
The start time of the call.
(HH:MM:SS)
The end date of the call.
The end time of the call.
(HH:MM:SS)
The processing result. (Answered/
Abandoned/Overflowed/
The incoming ICD Group number.
The extension number of the agent that received the call.
The answering member. (Extension
Name/Extension Number)
The talking time. (HH:MM:SS)
The waiting time.(HH:MM:SS) *3
The incoming trunk group number.
The caller’s number.
*1
*2
*3
Unanswered is displayed when the agent did not answer the call if the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform
Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
Displayed only when the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
The unanswered wait time is displayed when the call was Unanswered and the ICD group distribution method is set to
Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
Note
The displays described in *1–*3 can be changed through system programming. For details, consult your system administrator.
No graphical data is supported for Call Report.
b.
The results report can be output in one of the following 2 ways:
• Export : Click Export , and save the report file.
• Print : Click Print to print the report.
c.
Click Close .
Operating Manual 331
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
332 Operating Manual
Section 5
Appendix
This section provides the List of Operations by
Telephone Type, the Troubleshooting, the Feature
Number Table and Tone List. Check the
Troubleshooting section before consulting your dealer.
Operating Manual 333
5.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
The features that each type of telephone supports are marked with a ü . Features without a ü for a certain telephone type are not supported for that telephone type.
• Some operations of these features may not be supported by a certain telephone type. For details, refer to the each section’s operations.
Features
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE
Using an Account Code (Account Code
With a One-touch Button (One-touch
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PT
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PS
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
ü ü ü
ü ü ü
S-PS
ü
ü
ü ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
334 Operating Manual
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Features
PT
Setting Callback on an ISDN Line
(Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/
Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy
Monitoring Another Extension (Call
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another
Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another
Answering a Call from Another Telephone
Answering a Call from Another Telephone
Denying Other People the Possibility of
Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PS
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
S-PS
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Operating Manual 335
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Features
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker
(Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties
(Malicious Call Identification [MCID])
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN
Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Leaving a Conference (Unattended
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Threeparty Conference)
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call
Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Threeparty Conference [3PTY]—by ISDN)
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the
Conversation (Off-hook Monitor)
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PT
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PS
ü
ü
ü
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
ü ü
S-PS
ü
ü ü ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
336 Operating Manual
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Features
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding
Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN
Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s
Telephone Display (Absent Message)
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your
Telephone (Extension Dial Lock)
To make an outside call while your extension is locked
Paging and then Transferring a Call
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
To allow/deny a paging announcement (Paging
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PT
ü
ü
PS
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
ü ü ü
S-PS
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Operating Manual 337
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Features
PT
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb
ü
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed
ü
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-
hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA) *6 *7
ü
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the
Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being
Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected
Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line
Identification Restriction [CLIR])
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your
Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification
1.9.10 Checking the Time Service Status
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring
1.9.12 Using Your PS or S-PS in Parallel with a
Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired
Telephone (One-numbered extension)
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution
Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming
Call Distribution Group Monitor)
Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PS
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
S-PS
ü ü ü ü
ü
ü ü ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
338 Operating Manual
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Features
PT
Monitoring and Changing the Log-in/Logout Status of Extensions
1.10.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
Accessing External Services (External
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type
Environment (Hospitality Features)
Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room
Extension (Remote Wake-up Call)
1.12.2 Recording Information Using
Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message)
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PS
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
S-PS
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
Operating Manual 339
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Features
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your
Extension (Extension PIN [Personal
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Changing Call Charges and Extension
PT
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PS
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Telephone Type
SIP phone
SLT
KX-UT series
Non-
KX-UT series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Only available for the KX-UT133, KX-UT136, KX-UT248, and KX-UT670.
Available telephones are as follows:
•
IP-PTs (except models with a single line display)
•
DPTs (except models with a single line display)
Not available for the KX-UT670.
Live Call Screening (LCS)" and " Recording Your Conversation" are only available for PTs and PSs.
" Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)" is only available for PTs, SLTs and SIP phones.
OHCA is only available for certain DPTs.
Whisper OHCA is only available for IP-PTs and certain DPTs.
Only available for DPTs.
Only available for Display PTs.
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
S-PS
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
340 Operating Manual
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
*10
*11
*12
*13
Only available for the KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series, KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, and KX-T7600 series.
Only available for the KX-NT366 and KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560.
Only available for the KX-UT248 and KX-UT670.
" Setting the Timed Reminder" is only available for PTs, SLTs and SIP phones.
Operating Manual 341
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem
The telephone does not work properly.
The telephone does not respond when buttons are pressed.
Some features do not work.
Even though following the manual instructions, none of the operations work when using a proprietary telephone.
The parallelled single line telephones do not ring.
My proprietary telephone does not have a feature button.
Remedy
•
•
Confirm with your manager that your settings are correct.
If the problem persists, consult your dealer.
• The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone.
(
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock),
• System management may restrict certain features.
Consult your manager.
• The feature numbers have changed.
Confirm the revised number and try again.
• The Intercom line was not seized.
The seized line, when going off-hook, was changed by personal setting. (
In the manual, going off-hook means an
Intercom line is seized.
If the setting has been changed, press the
INTERCOM or PDN button after going off-hook and follow the instructions.
• "No ring" may be selected.
Change the setting to ring. (
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
• Some models do not have the feature button.
Change a flexible button to the desired button. (
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
Enter the specified feature number instead of the feature button. (
342 Operating Manual
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
A reorder tone is audible or "Restricted" is displayed.
I cannot make an outside call using the Onetouch Dialling button or speed dialling.
I cannot remember the feature numbers.
While talking to an outside party, the line is disconnected.
Redialling does not function.
I cannot have a conversation using the
Bluetooth headset.
I cannot register, de-register, or confirm the ID of the Bluetooth headset.
The PC and fax machine communication failed.
Remedy
• The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone.
(
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock),
• Toll restriction is activated.
Consult your manager or dealer.
• An account code is required.
(
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions,
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
• A line access number was not stored.
A line access number is required for outside calls. (
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
•
•
If the feature numbers have been changed from the default values, write the new feature
numbers in the table in "5.3.1 Feature Number
Ask your dealer to change the feature numbers for easier use.
• The time limit has run out.
(
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer),
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation)
Consult your dealer to extend the time limit, if necessary.
• The dialled number was more than 32 digits.
(
•
•
•
Make sure that the headset is properly registered to the module.
Make sure that the headset is properly charged according to the manual of the headset.
Remove the wired headset from the headset jack. Priority is given to the wired headset when both are connected.
• Make sure that the module is properly installed in the IP-PT/DPT.
• An indication tone may have interrupted communication.
(
Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Operating Manual 343
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
I do not want to show my telephone number to the calling or called party’s telephone.
I want to show my telephone number to the calling or called party’s telephone.
I cannot send a call waiting tone to the dialled extension.
I forgot the password.
The background music started suddenly.
I do not want to display a number which is stored in memory.
I want to confirm my extension number.
The date and time are not correct.
The visibility of the display is poor.
I want to specify the ringing tones.
The MESSAGE button light has lit up.
Remedy
• (
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number
Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction
[COLR]), 1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being
Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone
(Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR]))
• (
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone
(Calling/Connected Line Identification
• The other party has not set the Call Waiting feature.
(
Sending a Call Waiting Notification
(Call Waiting), 1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting,
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Offhook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
• The other party has set Data Line Security.
(
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against
Notification Tones (Data Line Security))
• Ask the manager to assist you.
(
• Turn off the music.
(
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music
(BGM), 2.1.4 Turning on the External
• Conceal the number.
(
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
• (
Your Extension Number in 1.1.5 Before
• Set the date and time by system programming.
Consult your dealer.
• Change the Display contrast level.
(
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming
• (
To specify the ringing tones for each CO,
ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button
(DPT/IP-PT only), 3.1.3 Customising the
• Another extension left you a message waiting indication or someone left a message in your mailbox while you were on the phone or away from your desk.
344 Operating Manual
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
An SDN button on my extension does not work.
I cannot use the secondary Ethernet port.
Remedy
• A PDN button is not assigned on the extension corresponding to your SDN button.
Create a PDN button on the desired extension. (
• If you are using a KX-NT500 series telephone, check whether ECO mode is enabled (
Operating the Telephones). If it is enabled, ask
your dealer to disable ECO mode. For other types of IP-PTs, contact your dealer.
Operating Manual 345
5.3 Feature Number Table
5.3 Feature Number Table
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Numbers listed below are the default settings. There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers. If you change the flexible feature numbers, fill in your assigned numbers (new) in the list for future reference.
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
To call an operator (Operator Call)
To select an idle outside line automatically (Automatic Line Access)
To select an idle outside line in the specified outside line group automatically (Outside Line Group
9/0
( )
0/9
( )
8
( ) outside phone no.
outside line group no. (2 digits) + outside phone no.
7
( ) private phone no.
Using an Account Code (Account
49
( ) account code + # + outside phone no.
Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
– To store
– To dial
30
( )
( ) personal speed dialling no. (2 digits) + phone no. + #
+ personal speed dialling no. (2 digits)
– To dial system speed dialling no. (3 digits)
( )
740
( )
– To store
– To set
– To cancel
Redialling the Last Number You
#
( )
2 + phone no. + #
1
0
346 Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or
To cancel callback ringing (Automatic
Callback Busy Cancel)/To cancel
Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who
Left an Indication (Message Waiting)
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
– To leave/cancel
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
– To call back
– To clear
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
Using Your Calling Privileges at
To call with a verification code
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System
– To an extension
(In All Security Mode only)
– To an outside party
(In Trunk Security Mode/All Security
Mode only)
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from
Another Extension or through DISA
– From another extension
– Through DISA
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at
Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Default
(New)
46
( )
70
( )
Additional digits/buttons
1/0 + extension no.
47
( )
2
0 + your extension no.
extension no. + extension PIN + phone no.
+ verification code + verification code
PIN + phone no.
your extension no./( + verification code) + extension PIN/verification code
PIN + extension no.
your extension no./( + verification code) + extension PIN/verification code
PIN + outside phone no.
your extension no. + extension PIN + feature no.
Operating Manual 347
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– Group
– Directed
Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls
– To deny
– To allow
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External
Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any
– Calls through an external speaker
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling
Parties (Malicious Call Identification
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call
ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by
Transferring to an Outside Party
– Blind Transfer
Default
(New)
40
( )
41
( )
720
( )
42
( )
7 3
( )
62
( )
61
( )
To hold (Call Hold)/To retrieve a call
To retrieve a call (Call Hold Retrieve)
– Specified with a held line number
– Specified with a holding extension number
– To set
– To retrieve
50
( )
53
( )
51
( )
52
( )
1
0
Additional digits/buttons group no. (2 digits) extension no.
Site ID (2 digits) phone no.
phone no. + # outside line no. which is held (3 digits) extension no. which has a held call parking zone no. (2 digits)/ stored parking zone no. (2 digits)
348 Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Answering Call Waiting from the
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Conversation Using the ISDN Service
(Three-party Conference [3PTY]—by
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
– To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
To set/cancel (Call Forwarding [FWD] for your Incoming Call Distribution
Group)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
Default
(New)
50
( )
60
( )
62
( )
Additional digits/buttons phone no. + TRANSFER button + 3
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
713
( )
0 (Cancel)/
1 (Do Not Disturb [DND])/
2 (All calls) + phone no. + #/
3 (Busy) + phone no. + #/
4 (No Answer) + phone no. + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + phone no. + #/
7 (Follow Me) + your extension no./
8 (Follow Me Cancel) + your extension no.
00–99 (second)
714
( )
715
( )
716
( )
1 (Set) + ICD Group extension no. + phone no. + #/
0 (Cancel) + ICD Group extension no.
Operating Manual 349
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]— by ISDN)
– To set
– To cancel
– To confirm
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the
Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent
– To set
– To cancel
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial
– To lock
– To unlock
– To make an outside call while your extension is locked
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging
– To answer
– To deny
– To allow
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
– To call and start a conversation
– To call and make an announcement
Default
(New)
7 5
( )
Additional digits/buttons outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber no. + # + 2 (Unconditional)/3
(Busy)/4 (No Reply) + phone no. + # outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber no. + # + 0 outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber no. + # + 1
750
( )
1–9 (+ parameter) + #
0
77
( )
47
( )
33
( )
1
0 + extension PIN your extension no. + extension PIN + phone no.
paging group no. (2 digits)
43
( )
721
( )
32
( )
1
0 conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code + # conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code + #
350 Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– To make a conference group call with an entry code
– To join a conversation with an entry code
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed
– To set
– To cancel
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call
Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement
– For intercom calls
(No call/Tone/OHCA/Whisper
OHCA)
– For outside calls
(No tone/Tone)
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone
Number on the Called Party and
Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected
Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/
– Public
– Your extension
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone
Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line
Identification Restriction [COLR])
– To show
– To prevent
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code + #
# + conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code + #
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
760
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer)
+ UM group’s floating extension no.
12H: 1 + hour/minute + 0 (AM)/1 (PM)
+ 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + hour/minute + 0 (once)/1
(daily)
0
731
( )
732
( )
7 2
( )
0 (No call)/1 (Tone)/2 (OHCA)/3
(Whisper OHCA)
0 (No tone)/1 (Tone)
1
2
7 0
( )
0
1
Operating Manual 351
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being
Displayed on the Called Party’s
Telephone (Calling Line Identification
– To show
– To prevent
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from
Joining Your Conversation (Executive
– To prevent
– To allow
1.9.8 Turning on the Background
– To set
– To cancel
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against
Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
– To set
– To cancel
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled
Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
– Ring
– No Ring
1.9.12 Using Your PS or S-PS in
Parallel with a Wired Telephone
– To set
– To cancel
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Onenumbered extension)
– To set
– To cancel
To pickup the call
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your
Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
Default
(New)
7 1
( )
Additional digits/buttons
0
1
733
( )
1
0
751
( )
BGM no. (1 digit)
0
730
( )
1
0
39
( )
1
0
48
( )
1 + paired wired extension no.
0
48
( )
41
( )
790
( )
1 + paired wired extension no.
0 paired wired extension no.
352 Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call
Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out,
Log-in
Log-out
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call
Distribution Group (Incoming Call
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is
1.11.2 If an External Relay is
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
(External Feature Access [EFA])
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a
Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality
Room Extension (Remote Wake-up
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
736
( )
735
( )
739
( )
1 + ICD Group extension no./
0 + ICD Group extension no./
1 (Not Ready)/0 (Ready)
ICD Group extension no.
31
( )
55
( )
56
( )
60
( ) doorphone no. (2 digits) doorphone no. (2 digits) relay no. (2 digits) service code
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All Calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer)
+ voice mail floating extension no. + #
76
( )
Operating Manual 353
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– To set
– To cancel
– To confirm
1.12.2 Recording Information Using
Preprogrammed Messages (Printing
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
– To set an extension status to
Service-out
– To set an extension status to
Service-in
To lock/unlock other extensions
– To unlock
– To lock
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
– Day/Night/Lunch/Break
– To start
– To stop
Default
(New)
761
( )
727
( )
727
( )
Additional digits/buttons
12H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute
+ 0 (AM)/1 (PM) + 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute
+ 0 (once)/1 (daily)
0 + extension no.
2 + extension no.
message no. (+ parameter) + # your extension no. + extension PIN
#
+ your extension no. + extension PIN
782
( )
783
( )
780
( )
35
( ) extension no.
extension no.
0/1/2/3
Site ID (2 digits)/ + BGM no. (1 digit)
Site ID (2 digits)/ + 0
354 Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages
–
–
–
–
To record
To play back
To record from an external BGM
(MOH) port
To clear
Default
(New)
36
( )
Additional digits/buttons
1 + OGM floating extension no.
[To specify a site ID]
9 + Site ID (2 digits) + 1 + OGM floating extension no.
2 + OGM floating extension no.
[To specify a site ID]
9 + Site ID (2 digits) + 2 + OGM floating extension no.
3 + 1 + OGM floating extension no.
[To specify a site ID]
9 + Site ID (2 digits) + 3 + 1 + OGM
0 + OGM floating extension no.
[To specify a site ID]
9 + Site ID (2 digits) + 0 + OGM floating extension no.
outside line no. (3 digits)
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an
Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
[Personal Identification Number])
– To set
785
( )
784
( )
799
( ) another PBX extension no. + #
1 + extension PIN + # + same extension
PIN + #
0 + stored extension PIN – To cancel
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Supervisor only
Hotel operator only
Manager only
Manager and preprogrammed extension user only
The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialling)
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Default
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
1
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
Operating Manual 355
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialling)
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who
Left an Indication (Message Waiting)
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)/
Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
Feature
(While dialling or talking)
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
Default
3
4
5
6
Fixed Number
3
5
356 Operating Manual
5.4 What is This Tone?
5.4 What is This Tone?
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
While on-hook
Ring Tones
The following tones are programmable allowing recognition of call type (Outside,
Intercom or Doorphone).
Tone 1
1 s
Tone 2
1 s
Tone 3
1 s
Tone 4
1 s
When going off-hook
Dial Tones
Tone 1
Normal
1 s
• For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users: Tone 1 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
– Absent Message
– Call Pickup Deny
– Call Waiting
– Extension Dial Lock
– Executive Busy Override Deny
Operating Manual 357
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
Tone 2
• When any of the following features are set:
– Absent Message
– Background Music
– Call Forwarding
– Call Pickup Deny
– Call Waiting
– Do Not Disturb
– Extension Dial Lock
– Executive Busy Override Deny
– Hot Line
– Timed Reminder
1 s
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: Tone 2 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
– Display Lock
• For KX-UT series SIP phone and S-PS users: Tone 2 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
– Call Forwarding
– Do Not Disturb
Tone 3
• When answering an external sensor call
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP phones and S-PSs)
• After pressing TRANSFER or
Recall/hookswitch to hold a call temporarily (e.g., Call Splitting)
• While a called PS is being searched
• When Account Code Entry is performed
• When answering a Timed
Reminder call with no message
Tone 4
Message waiting indication was received.
1 s
1 s
358 Operating Manual
When you make calls
Busy Tone
1 s
Reorder Tone
The outside line you tried to seize is not assigned or denied.
Ringback Tones
Tone 1
1 s
1 s
Tone 2
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP phones and S-PSs)
1 s
Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP phones and S-PSs)
The dialled extension is refusing incoming calls.
While off-hook
Indication Tones
Tone 1
Call waiting tone
1 s
Tone 2
A call is on hold longer than the specified time
When talking to an outside party
Warning Tone
This tone is sent 15, 10 and 5 seconds before the specified time for disconnection.
For KX-UT series SIP phones and
S-PSs, this tone is sent only once
15 seconds before the specified time for disconnection.
1 s
15 s
15 s
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
Operating Manual 359
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
When setting the features or programming
Confirmation Tones
Tone 1
• The feature setting was set successfully.
• A call is received in Voice-calling mode.
Tone 2
• Before receiving a page through an external speaker
• You receive a call in Hands-free mode.
• You established a call with a
KX-UT series SIP phone that has
Hands-free Answerback enabled.
Tone 3
• Before the following features activate:
– Retrieving a held call
– Picking up another call
– Paging/Answering a paging announcement
– Answering the call through a speaker
• You establish a call with an extension in the following cases:
– The called extension has hands-free Answerback enabled and is not a KX-UT series SIP phone.
– Voice-calling mode
• When making a call to or from a doorphone.
Tone 4
Establishing or leaving a conference
1 s
1 s
1 s
1 s
Tone 5
A call has been put on hold.
1 s
360 Operating Manual
5.5 Revision History
5.5 Revision History
5.5.1 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx
New Contents
•
– Remote Office
•
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
•
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
– OHCA
•
1.9.12 Using Your PS or S-PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
•
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Changed Contents
•
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
What Kind of Telephone Can Be Used?
Using a Navigator Key/Volume Key
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone or KX-UT Series SIP Phone
•
•
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
•
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
Customising the Flexible Buttons
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
•
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
•
5.5.2 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx
Changed Contents
•
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
•
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
•
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
•
Operating Manual 361
5.5.3 PCMPR Software File Version 003.0xxxx
5.5.3 PCMPR Software File Version 003.0xxxx
New Contents
•
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Caller Information Display before Call Pickup using DSS button
•
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (One-numbered extension)
•
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Changed Contents
•
•
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
•
•
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication (Message
•
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
•
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
•
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
•
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
•
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
•
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
•
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
•
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
•
•
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
•
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
•
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
•
•
Customising the Flexible Buttons
•
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
•
362 Operating Manual
5.5.4 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx
•
5.5.4 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx
Changed Contents
•
•
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
•
•
•
•
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
•
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
•
•
•
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
•
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
•
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
•
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
•
•
•
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
•
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
•
•
•
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
•
•
•
•
•
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
•
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
•
5.5.5 PCMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx
Changed Contents
•
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
•
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Operating Manual 363
5.5.6 PCMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx
•
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
•
•
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
•
1.8.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
•
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
•
•
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
•
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.5.6 PCMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx
Changed Contents
•
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
•
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
5.5.7 PCMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
Changed Contents
•
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
•
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
•
•
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
5.5.8 PCMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx
Changed Contents
•
•
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
•
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
•
•
•
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
5.5.9 PCMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx
Changed Contents
•
•
364 Operating Manual
The KX-NS1000UK and KX-NS1000NE are designed to interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. declares that the KX-NS1000UK and the KX-NS1000NE are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE)
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting:
Contact to Authorised Representative:
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany http://www.ptc.panasonic.eu
For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.
Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record the model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com/
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.
© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2011
PNQX3644LA DD1111HH13115
advertisement
Key Features
- IP communication using IP phones, SIP phones, and SIP-CS compatible Portable Stations
- Cellular phone integration, allowing you to make and receive calls as if they were registered extensions
- Built-in unified messaging, letting you redirect incoming calls to your mailbox and access messages remotely
- Call Centre feature with Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group for efficient call handling
- Communication Assistant (CA) support, enabling users to connect to the PBX and make calls from their PCs
- CA Call Accounting for tracking call activity and estimating costs